This is a modern-English version of Chess Fundamentals, originally written by Capablanca, José Raúl.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
CHESS
FUNDAMENTALS
BY
BY
JOSÉ R. CAPABLANCA
CHESS CHAMPION OF THE WORLD
World Chess Champion
NEW YORK
NYC
HARCOURT, BRACE & WORLD, INC.
LONDON: G. BELL AND SONS, LTD.
COPYRIGHT, 1921, BY
COPYRIGHT, 1921, BY
HARCOURT, BRACE & WORLD, INC.
HARCOURT, BRACE & WORLD, INC.
© 1949 BY OLGA CAPABLANCA
© 1949 BY OLGA CAPABLANCA
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording, or any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or shared in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or any information storage and retrieval system, without written permission from the publisher.
Seventeenth Printing
17th Printing
PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Made in the USA
PREFACE
Chess Fundamentals was first published thirteen years ago. Since then there have appeared at different times a number of articles dealing with the so-called Hypermodern Theory. Those who have read the articles may well have thought that something new, of vital importance, had been discovered. The fact is that the Hypermodern Theory is merely the application, during the opening stages generally, of the same old principles through the medium of somewhat new tactics. There has been no change in the fundamentals. The change has been only a change of form, and not always for the best at that.
Chess Fundamentals was first published thirteen years ago. Since then, several articles discussing the so-called Hypermodern Theory have been released at various times. Those who have read these articles might have believed that something new and significant had been discovered. The truth is that the Hypermodern Theory is simply the application, mainly during the opening stages, of the same old principles using somewhat new tactics. There hasn’t been any change in the fundamentals. The only change has been in form, and not always for the better.
In chess the tactics may change but the strategic fundamental principles are always the same, so that Chess Fundamentals is as good now as it was thirteen years ago. It will be as good a hundred years from now; as long in fact as the laws and rules of the game remain what they are at present. The reader may therefore go over the contents of the book with the assurance that there is in it everything he needs, and that there is nothing to be added and nothing to be changed. Chess Fundamentals was the one standard work of its kind thirteen years ago and the author firmly believes that it is the one standard work of its kind now.
In chess, tactics may vary, but the basic strategic principles remain constant, which means that Chess Fundamentals is just as valuable now as it was thirteen years ago. It will still hold its worth a hundred years from now, as long as the game's laws and rules stay the same. Readers can confidently explore the contents of the book, knowing it contains everything they need, with nothing to add or change. Chess Fundamentals was the definitive work of its kind thirteen years ago, and the author firmly believes it still is today.
New York
New York City
Sept. 1, 1934
Sept. 1, 1934
LIST OF CONTENTS
PART I | |
CHAPTER I | |
First Principles: Endings, Middle-game and Openings | |
PAGE | |
1. Some Simple Friends | 3 |
2. Pawn Promotion | 9 |
3. Pawn Endgames | 13 |
4. Some Strong Positions in the Middle Game | 19 |
5. Value of the Pieces | 24 |
6. Opening Strategy Overview | 25 |
7. Centre Control | 28 |
8. Traps | 32 |
CHAPTER II | |
Endgame Strategies | |
9. A Key Principle | 35 |
10. A Classic Finale | 37 |
11. Getting a Passed Pawn | 40 |
12. How to determine which Pawn will be the first to promote to a Queen | 41 |
13. The Opponents | 43 |
14. The Relative Value of a Knight and a Bishop | 50 |
15. How to Checkmate with Knight and Bishop | 59 |
16. Queen vs. Rook | 62 |
CHAPTER III | |
Planning a Win in Midgame Play | |
17. Attacking without the help of Knights | 68 |
18. Using Knights as a Key Force in Attack | 71 |
19. Winning through Indirect Attack | 75 |
CHAPTER IV | |
General Theory | |
20. The Initiative | 77 |
21. Mass Direct Attacks | 78 |
22. The Power of the Imposed Threat | 82 |
23. Giving Up the Initiative | 89 |
24. Cutting Out Parts from the Scene of Action | 94 |
25. A Player's Motives Critiqued in a Sample Game | 99 |
CHAPTER V | |
Endgame Strategy | |
26. The Unexpected Assault from a Different Direction | 111 |
27. The Risk of a Comfortable Situation | 120 |
28. Endings with one Rook and Pawns | 122 |
29. A Tough Conclusion: Two Rooks and Pawns | 127 |
30. Rook, Bishop, and Pawns v. Rook, Knight, and Pawns (A Final Example of preserving Freedom whilst imposing restraint.) | 138 |
CHAPTER VI | |
Further Openings and Middlegames | |
31. Key Points about Pawns | 143 |
32. Some Possible Outcomes from a Ruy Lopez (showing the weakness of a backward Q B P; the power of a Pawn at K 5, etc.) | 146 |
33. The Impact of a "Hole" | 150 |
PART II | |
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES | |
GAME. | |
1. Queen's Gambit Declined (Game, 1909) White: F. J. Marshall. Black: J. R. Capablanca. | 159 |
2. Queen's Gambit Declined (San Sebastian, 1911) White: A. K. Rubinstein. Black: J. R. Capablanca. | 163 |
3. Irregular Defense (Havana, 1913) White: D. Janowski. Black: J. R. Capablanca. | 169 |
4. French Defense (St. Petersburg, 1913) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: E. A. Snosko-Borovski. | 174 |
5. Ruy Lopez (St. Pete, 1914) White: Dr. E. Lasker. Black: J. R. Capablanca. | 181 |
6. French Defense (Rice Memorial Tournament, 1916) White: O. Chajes. Black: J. R. Capablanca. | 189 |
7. Ruy Lopez (San Sebastián, 1911) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: A. Burn. | 197 |
8. Center Game (Berlin, 1913) White: J. Mieses. Black: J. R. Capablanca. | 201 |
9. Queen's Gambit Declined (Berlin, 1913) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: R. Teichmann. | 209 |
10. Petroff Defense (St. Petersburg, 1914) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: F. J. Marshall. | 215 |
11. Ruy Lopez (St. Petersburg, 1914) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: D. Janowski. | 221 |
12. French Defense (New York, 1918) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: O. Chajes. | 225 |
13. Ruy Lopez (NY, 1918) White: J. S. Morrison. Black: J.R. Capablanca. | 231 |
14. Queen's Gambit Declined (New York, 1918) White: F. J. Marshall. Black: J.R. Capablanca. | 238 |
CHESS FUNDAMENTALS
PART I
CHAPTER I
First Principles: Endings, Middle-Game and Openings
First Principles: Endings, Middle Game, and Openings
The first thing a student should do, is to familiarise himself with the power of the pieces. This can best be done by learning how to accomplish quickly some of the simple mates.
The first thing a student should do is get to know the power of the pieces. The best way to do this is by quickly learning how to achieve some of the basic checkmates.
1. SOME SIMPLE MATES
SOME EASY FRIENDS
Example 1.—The ending Rook and King against King.
Example 1.—The ending with a Rook and King versus just a King.
The principle is to drive the opposing King to the last line on any side of the board.
The goal is to push the opposing King to the last row on any side of the board.
In this position the power of the Rook is demonstrated by the first move, R - R 7, which immediately confines the Black King to the last rank, and the mate is quickly accomplished by: 1 R - R 7, K - Kt 1; 2 K - Kt 2.
In this position, the Rook's power is shown by the first move, R-R7, which quickly restricts the Black King to the last rank, and checkmate is achieved swiftly with: 1 R-R7, K-Kt1; 2 K-Kt2.
The combined action of King and Rook is needed to arrive at a position in which mate can be forced. The general principle for a beginner to follow is to
The teamwork of the King and Rook is necessary to reach a position where checkmate can be guaranteed. A basic rule for beginners to follow is to
keep his King as much as possible on the same rank, or, as in this case, file, as the opposing King.
keep his King as much as possible on the same rank, or, as in this case, file, as the opposing King.
When, in this case, the King has been brought to the sixth rank, it is better to place it, not on the same file, but on the one next to it towards the centre.
When the King has reached the sixth rank in this situation, it's better to position it not on the same file, but on the adjacent one towards the center.
2...K - B 1; 3 K - B 3, K - K 1; 4 K - K 4, K - Q 1; 5 K - Q 5, K - B 1; 6 K - Q 6.
2...K - B 1; 3 K - B 3, K - K 1; 4 K - K 4, K - Q 1; 5 K - Q 5, K - B 1; 6 K - Q 6.
Not K - B 6, because then the Black King will go back to Q 1 and it will take much longer to mate. If now the King moves back to Q 1, R - R 8 mates at once.
Not K - B 6, because then the Black King will move back to Q 1 and it will take much longer to checkmate. If the King moves back to Q 1 now, R - R 8 checkmates immediately.
6...K - Kt 1; 7 R - Q B 7, K - R 1; 8 K - B 6, K - Kt 1; 9 K - Kt 6, K - R 1; 10 R - B 8 mate.
6...K - Kt 1; 7 R - Q B 7, K - R 1; 8 K - B 6, K - Kt 1; 9 K - Kt 6, K - R 1; 10 R - B 8 mate.
It has taken exactly ten moves to mate from the original position. On move 5 Black could have played K - K 1, and, according to principle, White would have continued 6 K - Q 6, K - B 1 (the Black King will ultimately be forced to move in front of the White King and be mated by R - R 8); 7 K - K 6, K - Kt 1; 8 K - B 6, K - R 1; 9 K - Kt 6, K - Kt 1; 10 R - R 8 mate. {5}
It took exactly ten moves to checkmate from the starting position. On move 5, Black could have played K-K1, and, following the principle, White would have continued with 6 K-Q6, K-B1 (the Black King would eventually have to move in front of the White King and be checkmated by R-R8); 7 K-K6, K-Kt1; 8 K-B6, K-R1; 9 K-Kt6, K-Kt1; 10 R-R8 checkmate. {5}
Example 2.
Example 2.
Since the Black King is in the centre of the board, the best way to proceed is to advance your own King thus: 1 K - K 2, K - Q 4; 2 K - K 3. As the Rook has not yet come into play, it is better to advance the King straight into the centre of the board, not in front, but to one side of the other King. Should now the Black King move to K 4, the Rook drives it back by R - R 5 ch. On the other hand, if 2... K - B 5 instead, then also 3 R - R 5. If now 3... K - Kt 5, there follows 4 K - Q 3; but if instead 3... K - B 6; then 4 R - R 4, keeping the King confined to as few squares as possible.
Since the Black King is in the center of the board, the best way to proceed is to advance your own King like this: 1 K - K2, K - Q4; 2 K - K3. Since the Rook hasn't come into play yet, it's better to move the King straight into the center of the board, not in front, but to one side of the other King. If the Black King moves to K4 now, the Rook will push it back with R - R5 check. On the other hand, if 2... K - B5 instead, then also 3 R - R5. If now 3... K - Kt5, you follow with 4 K - Q3; but if instead 3... K - B6, then 4 R - R4, keeping the King confined to as few squares as possible.
Now the ending may continue: 4...K - B 7; 5 R - B 4 ch, K - Kt 6; 6 K - Q 3, K - Kt 7; 7 R - Kt 4 ch, K - R 6; 8 K - B 3, K - R 7. It should be noticed how often the White King has moved next to the Rook, not only to defend it, but also to reduce the mobility of the opposing King. Now {6}White mates in three moves thus: 9 R - R 4 ch, K - Kt 8; 10 R - any square on the Rook's file, forcing the Black King in front of the White, K - B 8; 11 R - R 1 mate. It has taken eleven moves to mate, and, under any conditions, I believe it should be done in under twenty. While it may be monotonous, it is worth while for the beginner to practice such things, as it will teach him the proper handling of his pieces.
Now the ending may continue: 4...K - B 7; 5 R - B 4 check, K - Kt 6; 6 K - Q 3, K - Kt 7; 7 R - Kt 4 check, K - R 6; 8 K - B 3, K - R 7. It should be noted how often the White King has moved next to the Rook, not just to defend it, but also to limit the mobility of the opposing King. Now {6}White can checkmate in three moves like this: 9 R - R 4 check, K - Kt 8; 10 R - any square on the Rook's file, forcing the Black King in front of the White King, K - B 8; 11 R - R 1 checkmate. It has taken eleven moves to achieve checkmate, and under any conditions, I believe it should be done in under twenty moves. While it may seem repetitive, it's worthwhile for beginners to practice these scenarios, as it will teach them how to properly handle their pieces.
Example 3.—Now we come to two Bishops and King against King.
Example 3.—Now we have two Bishops and a King against a King.
Since the Black King is in the corner, White can play 1 B - Q 3, K - Kt 2; 2 B - K Kt 5, K - B 2; 3 B - B 5, and already the Black King is confined to a few squares. If the Black King, in the original position, had been in the centre of the board, or away from the last row, White should have advanced his King, and then, with the aid of his Bishops, restricted {7}the Black King's movements to as few squares as possible.
Since the Black King is in the corner, White can play 1 B - Q 3, K - Kt 2; 2 B - K Kt 5, K - B 2; 3 B - B 5, and the Black King is already limited to a few squares. If the Black King, in the original position, had been in the center of the board or not on the last row, White should have moved his King forward, and then, with the help of his Bishops, would have restricted {7}the Black King's movements to as few squares as possible.
We might now continue: 3...K - Kt 2; 4 K - B 2. In this ending the Black King must not only be driven to the edge of the board, but he must also be forced into a corner, and, before a mate can be given, the White King must be brought to the sixth rank and, at the same time, in one of the last two files; in this case either K R 6, K Kt 6, K B 7, K B 8, and as K R 6 and K Kt 6 are the nearest squares, it is to either of these squares that the King ought to go. 4...K - B 2; 5 K - Kt 3, K - Kt 2; 6 K - R 4, K - B 2; 7 K - R 5, K - Kt 2; 8 B - Kt 6, K - Kt 1; 9 K - R 6, K - B 1. White must now mark time and move one of the Bishops, so as to force the Black King to go back; 10 B - R 5, K - Kt 1; 11 B - K 7, K - R 1. Now the White Bishop must take up a position from which it can give check next move along the White diagonal, when the Black King moves back to Kt 1. 12 B - K Kt 4, K - Kt 1; 13 B - K 6 ch, K - R 1; 14 B - B 6 mate.
We can continue now: 3...K - Kt 2; 4 K - B 2. In this ending, the Black King needs to be pushed to the edge of the board and also forced into a corner. Before we can deliver a checkmate, the White King has to be moved to the sixth rank and positioned in one of the last two files; in this situation, that means either K R 6, K Kt 6, K B 7, K B 8. Since K R 6 and K Kt 6 are the closest squares, the King should go to one of these squares. 4...K - B 2; 5 K - Kt 3, K - Kt 2; 6 K - R 4, K - B 2; 7 K - R 5, K - Kt 2; 8 B - Kt 6, K - Kt 1; 9 K - R 6, K - B 1. White now needs to wait and move one of the Bishops to force the Black King back; 10 B - R 5, K - Kt 1; 11 B - K 7, K - R 1. Now the White Bishop must go to a position where it can give check on the next move along the White diagonal, when the Black King moves back to Kt 1. 12 B - K Kt 4, K - Kt 1; 13 B - K 6 ch, K - R 1; 14 B - B 6 mate.
It has taken fourteen moves to force the mate and, in any position, it should be done in under thirty.
It has taken fourteen moves to checkmate, and in any situation, it should be done in under thirty.
In all endings of this kind, care must be taken not to drift into a stale mate.
In all conclusions like this, we need to be careful not to fall into a stalemate.
In this particular ending one should remember that the King must not only be driven to the edge of the board, but also into a corner. In all such endings, however, it is immaterial whether the King is forced {8}on to the last rank, or to an outside file, e.g. K R 5 or Q R 4, K 1 or Q 8.
In this particular endgame, it's important to remember that the King must not only be pushed to the edge of the board, but also into a corner. In all such endgames, it doesn’t really matter whether the King is forced onto the last rank or to an outside file, like K R 5 or Q R 4, K 1 or Q 8.
Example 4.—We now come to Queen and King against King. As the Queen combines the power of the Rook and the Bishop, it is the easiest mate of all and should always be accomplished in under ten moves. Take the following position:
Example 4.—Now we arrive at the situation of Queen and King versus King. Since the Queen has the combined power of the Rook and the Bishop, this is the simplest checkmate and should always be achieved in fewer than ten moves. Consider the following position:
A good way to begin is to make the first move with the Queen, trying to limit the Black King's mobility as much as possible. Thus: 1 Q - B 6, K - Q 5; 2 K - Q 2. Already the Black King has only one available square 2...K - K 4; 3 K - K 3, K - B 4; 4 Q - Q 6, K - Kt 4. (Should Black play K - Kt 5, then Q - Kt 6 ch); 5 Q - K 6, K - R 5 (if K - R 4, K - B 4 and mate next move); 6 Q - K Kt 6, K - R 6; 7 K - B 3, K moves; 8 Q mates.
A good way to start is by moving the Queen first, trying to limit the Black King's movement as much as possible. So: 1 Q - B 6, K - Q 5; 2 K - Q 2. Already, the Black King has only one available square: 2...K - K 4; 3 K - K 3, K - B 4; 4 Q - Q 6, K - Kt 4. (If Black plays K - Kt 5, then Q - Kt 6 ch); 5 Q - K 6, K - R 5 (if K - R 4, then K - B 4 and mate next move); 6 Q - K Kt 6, K - R 6; 7 K - B 3, K moves; 8 Q mates.
In this ending, as in the case of the Rook, the Black King must be forced to the edge of the board; only {9}the Queen being so much more powerful than the Rook, the process is far easier and shorter. These are the three elementary endings and in all of these the principle is the same. In each case the co-operation of the King is needed. In order to force a mate without the aid of the King, at least two Rooks are required.
In this ending, similar to the Rook scenario, the Black King needs to be pushed to the edge of the board; with the Queen being significantly more powerful than the Rook, this process is much easier and quicker. These are the three basic endings, and in each case, the principle remains the same. The cooperation of the King is essential. To achieve a checkmate without the King’s assistance, at least two Rooks are necessary.
2. PAWN PROMOTION
2. Promotion of Pawn
The gain of a Pawn is the smallest material advantage that can be obtained in a game; and it often is sufficient to win, even when the Pawn is the only remaining unit, apart from the Kings. It is essential, speaking generally, that
The gain of a Pawn is the smallest material advantage that can be obtained in a game; and it often is enough to win, even when the Pawn is the only remaining piece besides the Kings. It is essential, speaking generally, that
the King should be in front of his Pawn, with at least one intervening square.
The King should be in front of his Pawn, with at least one intervening square.
If the opposing King is directly in front of the Pawn, then the game cannot be won. This can best be explained by the following examples.
If the opposing King is right in front of the Pawn, then the game can't be won. This can be best explained with the following examples.
Example 5.
Example 5.
The position is drawn, and the way to proceed is for Black to keep the King always directly in front of the Pawn, and when it cannot be done, as for instance in this position because of the White King, then the Black King must be kept in front of the White King. The play would proceed thus: 1 P - K 3, K - K 4; 2 K - Q 3, K - Q 4. This is a very important move. Any other move would lose, as will be shown later. As the Black King cannot be kept close up to the Pawn, it must be brought as far forward as possible and, at the same time, in front of the White King.
The position is established, and the next step is for Black to always keep the King directly in front of the Pawn. If that's not possible, as in this position due to the White King, then the Black King should be positioned in front of the White King. The play would continue like this: 1 P - K 3, K - K 4; 2 K - Q 3, K - Q 4. This is a very crucial move. Any other move would result in a loss, as will be explained later. Since the Black King cannot stay close to the Pawn, it must be moved as far forward as possible while also staying in front of the White King.
3 P - K 4 ch, K - K 4; 4 K - K 3, K - K 3; 5 K - B 4, K - B 3. Again the same case. As the White King comes up, the Black King must be kept in front of it, since it cannot be brought up to the Pawn.
3 P - K 4 ch, K - K 4; 4 K - K 3, K - K 3; 5 K - B 4, K - B 3. Once again, it’s the same situation. As the White King advances, the Black King needs to stay in front of it, because it can't move towards the Pawn.
6 P - K 5 ch, K - K 3; 7 K - K 4, K - K 2; 8 K - Q 5, K - Q 2; 9 P - K 6 ch, K - K 2; 10 K - K 5, K - K 1; 11 K - Q 6, K - Q 1. If now White advances the Pawn, the Black King gets in front of it and White must either give up the Pawn or play K - K 6, and a stale mate results. If instead of advancing the Pawn White withdraws his King, Black brings his King up to the Pawn and, when forced to go back, he moves to K in front of the Pawn ready to come up again or to move in front of the White King, as before, should the latter advance.
6 P - K 5 ch, K - K 3; 7 K - K 4, K - K 2; 8 K - Q 5, K - Q 2; 9 P - K 6 ch, K - K 2; 10 K - K 5, K - K 1; 11 K - Q 6, K - Q 1. If White moves the Pawn forward, the Black King steps in front of it, and White has to either give up the Pawn or play K - K 6, resulting in a stalemate. If instead of moving the Pawn, White pulls back his King, Black brings his King up to the Pawn, and when forced to retreat, he moves to K in front of the Pawn, ready to approach again or to step in front of the White King, like before, if the latter moves forward.
The whole mode of procedure is very important and the student should become thoroughly conversant {11}with its details; for it involves principles to be taken up later on, and because many a beginner has lost identical positions from lack of proper knowledge. At this stage of the book I cannot lay too much stress on its importance.
The entire process is really important, and the student should become fully familiar with its details; it involves concepts that will be covered later, and many beginners have missed the same opportunities due to a lack of proper knowledge. At this point in the book, I can't emphasize its importance enough.
Example 6.—In this position White wins, as the King is in front of his Pawn and there is one intervening square.
Example 6.—In this position, White wins because the King is in front of his Pawn and there’s one square in between.
The method to follow is to
The method to follow is to
advance the King as far as is compatible with the safety of the Pawn and never to advance the Pawn until it is essential to its own safety.
move the King as far as is safe for the Pawn and never move the Pawn until it's absolutely necessary for its own safety.
Thus:
Thus:
1. K - K 4, K - K 3.
1. K - K 4, K - K 3.
Black does not allow the White King to advance, therefore White is now compelled to advance his Pawn so as to force Black to move away. He is then able to advance his own King.
Black doesn't let the White King move forward, so White now has to push his Pawn to make Black move away. This allows him to move his own King forward.
2. P - K3, K - B 3; 3. K - Q 5, K - K 2.
2. P - K3, K - B 3; 3. K - Q 5, K - K 2.
If Black had played 3...K - B 4, then White would be forced to advance the Pawn to K 4, since he could not advance his King without leaving Black the opportunity to play K - K 5, winning the Pawn. Since he has not done so, it is better for White not to advance the Pawn yet, since its own safety does not require it, but to try to bring the King still further forward. Thus:
If Black had played 3...K-B4, White would have to move the Pawn to K4, as advancing his King would allow Black to play K-K5 and win the Pawn. Since White has not done that, it’s better for him not to advance the Pawn yet because it doesn’t need immediate protection. Instead, he should focus on moving the King further forward. So:
4. K - K 5, K - Q 2; 5. K - B 6, K - K 1.
4. K - K 5, K - Q 2; 5. K - B 6, K - K 1.
Now the White Pawn is too far back and it may be brought up within protection of the King.
Now the White Pawn is too far back, and it can be moved up under the protection of the King.
6. P - K 4, K - Q 2.
6. P - K4, K - Q2.
Now it would not do to play K - B 7, because Black would play K - Q 3, and White would have to bring back his King to protect the Pawn. Therefore he must continue.
Now it wouldn’t make sense to play K-B7, because Black would just play K-Q3, and White would have to move his King back to protect the Pawn. So he has to keep going.
7. P - K 5, K - K 1.
7. P - K 5, K - K 1.
Had he moved anywhere else, White could have played K - B 7, followed by the advance of the Pawn to K 6, K 7, K 8; all these squares being protected by the King. As Black tries to prevent that, White must now force him to move away, at the same time always keeping the King in front of the Pawn. Thus:
Had he moved anywhere else, White could have played K - B 7, followed by advancing the Pawn to K 6, K 7, K 8; all these squares being protected by the King. As Black tries to stop that, White now needs to force him to move away, while always keeping the King in front of the Pawn. So:
8. K - K 6.
8K - K 6.
P - K 6 would make it a draw, as Black would then play K - B, and we would have a position similar to the one explained in connection with Example 5.
P - K 6 would result in a draw, since Black would then play K - B, leading to a position like the one discussed in Example 5.
8...K - B 1; 9. K - Q 7.
8...K - B 1; 9. K - Q 7.
King moves and the White Pawn advances to K 8, becomes a Queen, and it is all over.
King moves, and the White Pawn advances to K 8, becomes a Queen, and it's all over.
This ending is like the previous one, and for the same reasons should be thoroughly understood before proceeding any further.
This ending is similar to the previous one, and for the same reasons, it should be fully understood before moving on.
3. PAWN ENDINGS
3. PAWN ENDGAMES
I shall now give a couple of simple endings of two Pawns against one, or three against two, that the reader may see how they can be won. Fewer explanations will be given, as it is up to the student to work things out for himself. Furthermore, nobody can learn how to play well merely from the study of a book; it can only serve as a guide and the rest must be done by the teacher, if the student has one; if not, the student must realise by long and bitter experience the practical application of the many things explained in the book.
I will now share a couple of simple endings with two Pawns against one, or three against two, so you can see how they can be won. There will be fewer explanations because it's up to the student to figure things out on their own. Also, no one can learn how to play well just by reading a book; it can only serve as a guide, and the rest has to come from the teacher, if the student has one. If not, the student will need to learn through long and tough experience the practical application of the many things discussed in the book.
Example 7.
Example 7.
In this position White cannot win by playing 1 P - B 6, because Black plays, not P × P, which would lose, but 1...K - Kt 1, and if then 2 P × P, K × P, and draws, as shown in a previous case. If 2 P - B 7 ch, K - B 1, and White will never be able to Queen his Pawn without losing it. If 2 K - K 7, P × P; 3 K × P, K - B 1, and draws. White, however, can win the position given in the diagram by playing:
In this position, White can't win by playing 1 P - B6, because Black plays not P × P, which would lose, but 1...K - Kt1. Then if 2 P × P, K × P, it results in a draw, as shown in a previous scenario. If 2 P - B7 ch, then K - B1, and White will never be able to promote his Pawn without losing it. If 2 K - K7, P × P; 3 K × P, K - B1, it ends in a draw. However, White can win the position shown in the diagram by playing:
1 K - Q 7, K - Kt 1; 2 K - K 7, K - R 1; 3 P - B 6, P × P. If 3...K - Kt 1; 4 P - B 7 ch, K - R 1; 5 P - B 8 (Q) mate.
1 K - Q 7, K - Kt 1; 2 K - K 7, K - R 1; 3 P - B 6, P × P. If 3...K - Kt 1; 4 P - B 7 ch, K - R 1; 5 P - B 8 (Q) mate.
4 K - B 7, P - B 4; 5 P - Kt 7 ch, K - R 2; 6 P - Kt 8 (Q) ch, K - R 3; 7 Q - Kt 6 mate.
4 K - B 7, P - B 4; 5 P - Kt 7 check, K - R 2; 6 P - Kt 8 (Q) check, K - R 3; 7 Q - Kt 6 checkmate.
Example 8.—In the above position White can't win by 1 P - B 5. Black's best answer would be P - Kt 3 draws. (The student should work this out.) He cannot win by 1 P - Kt 5, because P - Kt 3 draws. (This, because of the principle of the "opposition" {15}which governs this ending as well as all the Pawn-endings already given, and which will be explained more fully later on.)
Example 8.—In this position, White can't win with 1 P - B 5. Black's best response would be P - Kt 3, which leads to a draw. (The student should figure this out.) He can't win with 1 P - Kt 5 either, because P - Kt 3 also results in a draw. (This is due to the principle of the "opposition" {15} that applies to this endgame as well as all the previously mentioned pawn endings, and it will be explained in more detail later.)
White can win, however, by playing: 1 K - K 4, K - K 3. (If 1...P - Kt 3; 2 K - Q 4, K - K 3; 3 K - B 5, K - B 3; 4 K - Q 6, K - B 2; 5 P - Kt 5, K - Kt 2; 6 K - K 7, K - Kt 1; 7 K - B 6, K - R 2; 8 K - B 7 and White wins the Pawn.)
White can win, though, by playing: 1 K - K 4, K - K 3. (If 1...P - Kt 3; 2 K - Q 4, K - K 3; 3 K - B 5, K - B 3; 4 K - Q 6, K - B 2; 5 P - Kt 5, K - Kt 2; 6 K - K 7, K - Kt 1; 7 K - B 6, K - R 2; 8 K - B 7 and White wins the Pawn.)
2 P - B 5 ch, K - B 3; 3 K - B 4, P - Kt 3. (If this Pawn is kept back we arrive at the ending shown in Example 7.) 4 P - Kt 5 ch, K - B 2; 5 P - B 6, K - K 3; 6 K - K 4, K - B 2; 7 K - K 5, K - B 1. White cannot force his Bishop's Pawn into Q (find out why), but by giving his Pawn up he can win the other Pawn and the game. Thus:
2 P - B 5 check, K - B 3; 3 K - B 4, P - Kt 3. (If this Pawn is held back, we reach the ending shown in Example 7.) 4 P - Kt 5 check, K - B 2; 5 P - B 6, K - K 3; 6 K - K 4, K - B 2; 7 K - K 5, K - B 1. White cannot force his Bishop's Pawn to promote (find out why), but by sacrificing his Pawn, he can capture the other Pawn and win the game. So:
8 P - B 7, K × P; 9 K - Q 6, K - B 1; 10 K - K 6, K - Kt 2; 11 K - K 7, K - Kt 1; 12 K - B 6, K - R 2; 13 K - B 7, K - R 1; 14 K × P , K - Kt 1.
8 P - B 7, K × P; 9 K - Q 6, K - B 1; 10 K - K 6, K - Kt 2; 11 K - K 7, K - Kt 1; 12 K - B 6, K - R 2; 13 K - B 7, K - R 1; 14 K × P, K - Kt 1.
There is still some resistance in Black's position. In fact, the only way to win is the one given here, as will easily be seen by experiment.
There is still some resistance in Black's position. In fact, the only way to win is the one shown here, as you'll easily see by trying it out.
15 K - R 6 (if K - B 6, K - R 2; and in order to win White must get back to the actual position, as against 16 P - Kt 6 ch, K - R 1 draws), K - R 1; 16 P - Kt 6, K - Kt 1; 17 P - Kt 7, K - B 2; 18 K - R 7, and White queens the Pawn and wins.
15 K - R 6 (if K - B 6, K - R 2; and for White to win, they must return to the actual position, as opposed to 16 P - Kt 6 ch, K - R 1 which draws), K - R 1; 16 P - Kt 6, K - Kt 1; 17 P - Kt 7, K - B 2; 18 K - R 7, and White promotes the Pawn and wins.
This ending, apparently so simple, should show the student the enormous difficulties to be surmounted, {16}even when there are hardly any pieces left, when playing against an adversary who knows how to use the resources at his disposal, and it should show the student, also, the necessity of paying strict attention to these elementary things which form the basis of true mastership in Chess.
This ending, seemingly straightforward, should make the student aware of the significant challenges to overcome, {16}even when there are very few pieces remaining, while playing against an opponent who knows how to effectively use the resources available to them. It should also highlight for the student the importance of focusing closely on these fundamental elements that are essential for genuine mastery in Chess.
Example 9.—In this ending
Example 9.—In this conclusion
White can win by advancing any of the three Pawns on the first move, but it is convenient to follow the general rule, whenever there is no good reason against it, of advancing the Pawn that has no Pawn opposing it. Thus we begin by—
White can win by moving any of the three Pawns on the first move, but it’s helpful to stick to the general rule, whenever there's no strong reason not to, of advancing the Pawn that has no opposing Pawn. So we start by—
1. P - B 5, K - K 2.
1. P - B 5, K - K 2.
If P - Kt 3, P - B 6; and we have a similar ending to one of those shown above. If 1...P - R 3; 2 P - Kt 5.
If P - Kt 3, P - B 6; and we have a similar ending to one of those shown above. If 1...P - R 3; 2 P - Kt 5.
2. K - K 5, K - B 2; 3. P - Kt 5, K - K 2.
2. K - K5, K - B2; 3. P - Kt5, K - K2.
If 3...P - Kt 3; 4 P - B 6, and if 3...P - R 3; 4 P - Kt 6 ch, and in either case we have a similar ending to one of those already shown.
If 3...P - Kt 3; 4 P - B 6, and if 3...P - R 3; 4 P - Kt 6 ch, and in either case we have a similar ending to one of those already shown.
4. P - R 5,
4. P - R 5,
and by following it up with P - Kt 6 we have the same ending previously shown. Should Black play 4...P - Kt 3, then R P × P, P × P; P - B 6 ch with the same result.
and by following it up with P-Kt 6 we have the same ending previously shown. Should Black play 4...P-Kt 3, then R P × P, P × P; P-B 6 ch with the same result.
Having now seen the cases when the Pawns are all on one side of the board we shall now examine a case when there are Pawns on both sides of the board.
Having now looked at the situations where all the Pawns are on one side of the board, we will now explore a scenario where there are Pawns on both sides of the board.
Example 10.—In these cases the general rule is to act immediately on the side where you have the superior forces. Thus we have:
Example 10.—In these situations, the general guideline is to take immediate action where you have the greater strength. So we have:
1. P - K Kt 4.
1. P - K Kt 4.
It is generally advisable to advance the Pawn that is free from opposition.
It's usually a good idea to move the Pawn that isn't being challenged.
1. ........ | P - Q R 4. |
Black makes an advance on the other side, and now White considers whether or not he should stop the advance. In this case either way wins, but generally the advance should be stopped when the opposing King is far away.
Black moves forward on the other side, and now White thinks about whether he should block the advance. In this situation, either choice is a win, but usually the advance should be blocked when the opposing King is far away.
2. P - Q R 4, K - B 3; 3. P - R 4, K - K 3.
2. P - Q R 4, K - B 3; 3. P - R 4, K - K 3.
If 3...K - Kt 3, then simple counting will show that White goes to the other side with his King, wins the P at Q R 4, and then Queens his single Pawn long before Black can do the same.
If 3...K - Kt 3, then basic counting will show that White moves his King to the other side, captures the Pawn at QR4, and then promotes his single Pawn long before Black can do the same.
4. P - Kt 5, K - B 2; 5. K - B 5, K - Kt 2; 6. P - R 5, K - B 2.
4. P - Kt 5, K - B 2; 5. K - B 5, K - Kt 2; 6. P - R 5, K - B 2.
If 6...P - R 3; 7 P - Kt 6, and then the two Pawns defend themselves and White can go to the other side with his King, to win the other Pawn.
If 6...P - R 3; 7 P - Kt 6, then the two Pawns protect each other and White can move his King to the other side to capture the other Pawn.
7. K - K 5.
7. K - K 5.
4. SOME WINNING POSITIONS IN THE MIDDLE-GAME
4. SOME WINNING POSITIONS IN THE MIDDLE GAME
By the time the student has digested all that has been previously explained, he, no doubt, is anxious to get to the actual game and play with all the pieces. However, before considering the openings, we shall devote a little time to some combinations that often arise during the game, and which will give the reader some idea of the beauty of the game, once he becomes better acquainted with it.
By the time the student has absorbed everything that’s been explained so far, he is definitely eager to get to the actual game and start playing with all the pieces. However, before we dive into the openings, let’s spend a little time on some combinations that often come up during the game. These will give the reader a glimpse of the beauty of the game once he becomes more familiar with it.
Example 11.
Example 11.
It is Black's move, and thinking that White merely threatens to play Q - R 6 and to mate at K Kt 7, Black plays 1 ... R - K 1, threatening mate by way of R - K 8. White now uncovers his real and most effective threat, viz.:
It’s Black’s turn to move, and believing that White is just trying to play Q-R6 and checkmate at KKt7, Black plays 1...R-K1, threatening checkmate with R-K8. White now reveals his actual and most powerful threat, which is:
This same type of combination may come as the result of a somewhat more complicated position.
This kind of combination might result from a slightly more complicated situation.
Example 12.
Example 12.
White is a piece behind, and unless he can win it back quickly he will lose; he therefore plays:
White is a piece down, and unless he can quickly win it back, he will lose; so he plays:
1. Kt × Kt | B - Kt 4 |
He cannot take the Kt because White threatens mate by Q × P ch followed by R - R 3 ch.
He can’t take the Kt because White threatens checkmate with Q × P ch followed by R - R 3 ch.
2. Kt - K 7 ch | Q × Kt |
Again if B × Kt; Q × P ch, K × Q; R - R 3 ch, King moves; R - R 8 mate.
Again if B × Kt; Q × P ch, K × Q; R - R 3 ch, King moves; R - R 8 mate.
3. R × Q | B × R | |
4. Q - Q 7 |
Example 13.
Example 13.
This is another very interesting type of combination. Black has a R for a Kt and should therefore win, unless White is able to obtain some compensation immediately. White, in fact, mates in a few moves thus:
This is another really interesting type of combination. Black has a R for a Kt and should win, unless White can get some compensation right away. In fact, White can checkmate in a few moves like this:
1. Kt - B 6 ch | P × Kt |
Forced, otherwise Q X P mates.
Forced, otherwise Q X P mates.
2. Q - Kt 3 ch | K - R 1 | |
3. B × P mate. |
1. B × Kt | Q × B. |
If ...B × Kt; Q - B 3 threatens mate, and therefore wins the Q, which is already attacked.
If ...B × Kt; Q - B 3 threatens checkmate, and therefore captures the queen, which is already under attack.
2. Kt - B 6 ch | P × Kt | |
3. R - Kt 3 ch | K - R 1 | |
4. B × P mate. |
Example 15.—A very frequent type of combination is shown in the following position.
Example 15.—A very common type of combination is shown in the following position.
Here White is the exchange and a Pawn behind, but he can win quickly thus: 1 B × P ch, K × B. (If 1...K - R 1; 2 Q - K R 5, P - K Kt 3; 3 Q - R 6, and wins.)
Here, White is down an exchange and a pawn, but he can win quickly like this: 1 B x P check, K x B. (If 1...K - R 1; 2 Q - K R 5, P - K Kt 3; 3 Q - R 6, and wins.)
2 Q - R 5 ch, K - Kt 1; 3 Kt - Kt 5, and Black cannot stop mate at K R 7 except by sacrificing the Queen by Q - K 5, which would leave White with a Q for a R.
2 Q - R 5 ch, K - Kt 1; 3 Kt - Kt 5, and Black can’t stop mate at K R 7 except by sacrificing the Queen with Q - K 5, which would leave White with a Q for a R.
Example 16.—This same type of combination is seen in a more complicated form in the following position.
Example 16.—This same type of combination appears in a more complicated form in the following position.
White proceeds as follows: 1 Kt × Kt ch (this clears the line for the B); B × Kt (to stop the Kt from moving to Kt 5 after the sacrifice of the B); 2 R × B, Kt × R best; 3 B × P ch, K × B. (If 3..K - R 1; 4 Q - R 5, P - K Kt 3; 5 B × P ch, K - Kt 2; 6 Q - R 7 ch, K - B 3; 7 P - Kt 5 ch, K - K 3; 8 B × P ch, R × B; 9 Q - K 4 mate.) 4 Q - R 5 ch, K - Kt 1; 5 Kt - Kt 5, R - B 1; {24}6 Q - R 7 ch, K - B 1; 7 Q - R 8 ch, Kt - Kt 1; 8 Kt - R 7 ch, K - K 2; 9 R - K 1 ch, K - Q 1; 10 Q × Kt mate.
White proceeds as follows: 1 Kt × Kt ch (this clears the line for the B); B × Kt (to stop the Kt from moving to Kt 5 after the sacrifice of the B); 2 R × B, Kt × R best; 3 B × P ch, K × B. (If 3..K - R 1; 4 Q - R 5, P - K Kt 3; 5 B × P ch, K - Kt 2; 6 Q - R 7 ch, K - B 3; 7 P - Kt 5 ch, K - K 3; 8 B × P ch, R × B; 9 Q - K 4 mate.) 4 Q - R 5 ch, K - Kt 1; 5 Kt - Kt 5, R - B 1; {24} 6 Q - R 7 ch, K - B 1; 7 Q - R 8 ch, Kt - Kt 1; 8 Kt - R 7 ch, K - K 2; 9 R - K 1 ch, K - Q 1; 10 Q × Kt mate.
This combination is rather long and has many variations, therefore a beginner will hardly be able to fathom it; but, knowing the type of combination, he might under similar circumstances undertake and carry out a brilliant attack which he would otherwise never think of. It will be seen that all the combinations shown have for a foundation the proper co-ordination of the pieces, which have all been brought to bear against a weak point.
This combination is quite lengthy and has many variations, so a beginner would likely struggle to understand it. However, by recognizing the type of combination, they might be able to attempt and execute a brilliant attack in similar situations that they wouldn't have considered otherwise. It's clear that all the combinations shown are based on the effective coordination of the pieces, all targeting a weak point.
5. RELATIVE VALUE OF THE PIECES
5. RELATIVE VALUE OF THE PIECES
Before going on to the general principles of the openings, it is advisable to give the student an idea of the proper relative value of the pieces. There is no complete and accurate table for all of them, and the only thing to do is to compare the pieces separately.
Before discussing the general principles of openings, it's helpful to give the student a sense of the proper relative value of the pieces. There isn't a complete and accurate table for all of them, so the best approach is to compare the pieces individually.
For all general theoretical purposes the Bishop and the Knight have to be considered as of the same value, though it is my opinion that the Bishop will prove the more valuable piece in most cases; and it is well known that two Bishops are almost always better than two Knights.
For all general theoretical purposes, the Bishop and the Knight should be considered equal in value, although I believe the Bishop is usually the more valuable piece. It’s well known that two Bishops are almost always better than two Knights.
A Bishop and a Rook are also stronger than a Knight and a Rook, but a Queen and a Knight may be stronger than a Queen and a Bishop.
A Bishop and a Rook are also stronger than a Knight and a Rook, but a Queen and a Knight might be stronger than a Queen and a Bishop.
A Bishop will often be worth more than three Pawns, but a Knight very seldom so, and may even not be worth so much.
A Bishop is usually worth more than three Pawns, but a Knight rarely is, and it might not even be worth that much.
A Rook will be worth a Knight and two Pawns, or a Bishop and two Pawns, but, as said before, the Bishop will be a better piece against the Rook.
A Rook is worth a Knight and two Pawns, or a Bishop and two Pawns, but, as mentioned earlier, the Bishop is a stronger piece against the Rook.
Two Rooks are slightly stronger than a Queen. They are slightly weaker than two Knights and a Bishop, and a little more so than two Bishops and a Knight. The power of the Knight decreases as the pieces are changed off. The power of the Rook, on the contrary, increases.
Two Rooks are a bit stronger than a Queen. They are a little weaker than two Knights and a Bishop, and somewhat more so than two Bishops and a Knight. The strength of the Knight decreases as pieces are traded off. In contrast, the strength of the Rook increases.
The King, a purely defensive piece throughout the middle-game, becomes an offensive piece once all the pieces are off the board, and sometimes even when there are one or two minor pieces left. The handling of the King becomes of paramount importance once the end-game stage is reached.
The King, a strictly defensive piece during the middle game, turns into an offensive piece when all the other pieces are off the board, and sometimes even when there’s one or two minor pieces left. Managing the King becomes extremely important once the end game stage is reached.
6. GENERAL STRATEGY OF THE OPENING
6. GENERAL STRATEGY OF THE OPENING
The main thing is to develop the pieces quickly. Get them into play as fast as you can.
The main thing is to move the pieces quickly. Get them into play as fast as you can.
Example 17.—Suppose we begin:
Example 17.—Let’s get started:
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 |
This is both an attacking and a developing move. Black can now either reply with the identical move or play
This is both an offensive and a strategic move. Black can now either respond with the same move or play
2. ........ | Kt - Q B 3 |
This developing move at the same time defends the King's Pawn.
This move also protects the King's Pawn.
3. Kt - B 3 | Kt - B 3 |
These moves are of a purely developing nature.
These actions are purely for developmental purposes.
4. B - Kt 5 |
It is generally advisable not to bring this Bishop out until one Knight is out, preferably the King's Knight. The Bishop could also have been played to B 4, but it is advisable whenever possible to combine development and attack.
It's usually a good idea not to move this Bishop until one Knight is out, ideally the King's Knight. The Bishop could have also been moved to B 4, but it's best to combine development and attack whenever possible.
4. ........ | B - Kt 5 |
Black replies in the same manner, threatening a possible exchange of Bishop for Knight with Kt × P to follow.
Black responds similarly, threatening a potential exchange of Bishop for Knight with Kt × P to come next.
5. O - O |
5. ........ | O - O |
Black follows the same line of reasoning.
Black follows the same line of thinking.
6. P - Q 3 | P - Q 3 |
These moves have a two-fold object, viz.: to protect the King's Pawn and to open the diagonal for the development of the Queen's Bishop.
These moves have two purposes: to protect the King's Pawn and to open up the diagonal for the development of the Queen's Bishop.
7. B - Kt 5 |
A very powerful move, which brings us to the middle-game stage, as there is already in view a combination to win quickly by Kt - Q 5. This threat makes it impossible for Black to continue the same course. (There is a long analysis showing that Black should lose if he also plays B - Kt 5.) He is now forced to play 7...B × Kt, as experience has shown, thus bringing up to notice three things.
A very strong move, which takes us to the middle game stage, as there's already a visible combination to win quickly with Knight to Queen 5. This threat makes it impossible for Black to keep playing the same way. (A lengthy analysis demonstrates that Black will lose if he also plays Bishop to Knight 5.) He is now forced to play 7...Bishop takes Knight, as experience has shown, highlighting three things.
First, the complete development of the opening has taken only seven moves. (This varies up to ten or twelve moves in some very exceptional cases. As a rule, eight should be enough.) Second, Black has {28}been compelled to exchange a Bishop for a Knight, but as a compensation he has isolated White's Q R P and doubled a Pawn. (This, at such an early stage of the game, is rather an advantage for White, as the Pawn is doubled towards the centre of the board.) Third, White by the exchange brings up a Pawn to control the square Q 4, puts Black on the defensive, as experience will show, and thus keeps the initiative, an unquestionable advantage.[1]
First, the full development of the opening has taken only seven moves. (This can go up to ten or twelve moves in some very rare cases. Generally, eight should be sufficient.) Second, Black has been forced to exchange a Bishop for a Knight, but in return, he has isolated White's Q R P and doubled a Pawn. (This, at such an early stage of the game, is actually more of an advantage for White, as the Pawn is doubled towards the center of the board.) Third, by the exchange, White brings up a Pawn to control the square Q 4, puts Black on the defensive, as experience has shown, and thus maintains the initiative, an undeniable advantage.
The strategical principles expounded above are the same for all the openings, only their tactical application varies according to the circumstances.
The strategic principles outlined above apply to all openings; the only difference is in their tactical application, which changes based on the situation.
Before proceeding further I wish to lay stress on the following point which the student should bear in mind.
Before going any further, I want to emphasize the following point that students should keep in mind.
Before development has been completed no piece should be moved more than once, unless it is essential in order to obtain either material advantage or to secure freedom of action.
Before development is finished, no piece should be moved more than once unless it's necessary to gain a material advantage or to ensure freedom of action.
The beginner would do well to remember this, as well as what has already been stated: viz., bring out the Knights before bringing out the Bishops.
The beginner should keep this in mind, along with what has already been mentioned: namely, bring out the Knights before bringing out the Bishops.
7. CONTROL OF THE CENTRE
7. CENTER CONTROL
The four squares, K 4 and Q 4 on each side respectively, are the centre squares, and control of these squares is called control of the centre. The control of the centre is of great importance. No violent attack can succeed without controlling at least two of these {29}squares, and possibly three. Many a manœuvre in the opening has for its sole object the control of the centre, which invariably ensures the initiative. It is well always to bear this in mind, since it will often be the reason of a series of moves which could not otherwise be properly understood. As this book progresses I shall dwell more fully on these different points. At present I shall devote some time to openings taken at random and explain the moves according to general principles. The student will in that way train his mind in the proper direction, and will thus have less trouble in finding a way out when confronted with a new and difficult situation.
The four squares, K 4 and Q 4 on each side, are the center squares, and having control over these squares is referred to as control of the center. Controlling the center is very important. No aggressive attack can succeed without controlling at least two of these {29} squares, and possibly three. Many opening maneuvers aim solely to gain control of the center, which consistently provides the initiative. It's essential to keep this in mind, as it often explains a series of moves that might otherwise be confusing. As this book progresses, I'll elaborate more on these various points. For now, I'll spend time discussing random openings and explain the moves based on general principles. This way, the student will train their mind in the right direction and will find it easier to navigate new and challenging situations.
Example 18.
Example 18.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | P - Q 3 |
A timid move. Black assumes a defensive attitude at once. On principle the move is wrong. In the openings, whenever possible, pieces should be moved in preference to Pawns.
A cautious move. Black immediately takes a defensive stance. By principle, this move is incorrect. In the openings, whenever possible, pieces should be moved instead of Pawns.
3. P - Q 4 |
White takes the offensive immediately and strives to control the centre so as to have ample room to deploy his forces.
White goes on the attack right away and works to take control of the center to have plenty of space to position his forces.
3. ........ | Kt - Q 2 |
Black does not wish to relinquish the centre and also prefers the text move to Kt - Q B 3, which would be the more natural square for the Kt. But on {30}principle the move is wrong, because it blocks the action of the Queen's Bishop, and instead of facilitating the action of Black's pieces, tends, on the contrary, to cramp them.
Black doesn't want to give up the center and also prefers the knight move to Kt - QB3, which would be a more natural position for the knight. However, on {30}principle, the move is incorrect because it hinders the Queen's Bishop's action. Instead of helping Black's pieces, it actually tends to restrict them.
4. B - Q B 4 | P - K R 3 |
Black is forced to pay the penalty of his previous move. Such a move on Black's part condemns by itself any form of opening that makes it necessary. White threatened Kt - Kt 5 and Black could not stop it with 4...B - K 2, because of 5 P × P, Kt × P (if 5...P × P, 6 Q - Q 5); 6 Kt × Kt, P × Kt; 7 Q - R 5, and White wins a Pawn and has besides a perfectly safe position.
Black has to deal with the consequences of his earlier move. This move by Black basically damages any opening that led to it. White threatened Knight to Knight 5, and Black couldn't block it with 4...Bishop to King 2 because of 5 Pawn takes Pawn, Knight takes Pawn (if 5...Pawn takes Pawn, then 6 Queen to Queen 5); 6 Knight takes Knight, Pawn takes Knight; 7 Queen to Rook 5, and White gains a Pawn while also being in a completely safe position.
5. Kt - B 3 | K Kt - B 3 | |
6. B - K 3 | B - K 2 | |
7. Q - K 2 |
It should be noticed that White does not Castle yet. The reason is that he wants to deploy his forces first, and through the last move force Black to play P - Q B 3 to make room for the Queen as White threatens R - Q 1, to be followed by P × P. Black's other alternatives would finally force him to play P × P, thus abandoning the centre to White.
It should be noted that White hasn't castled yet. The reason is that he wants to position his pieces first, and by making his last move, he forces Black to play P - QB3 to create space for the Queen as White threatens R - Q1, which will be followed by P × P. Black's other options would ultimately push him to play P × P, thereby giving up control of the center to White.
7. ........ | P - B 3 | |
8. R - Q 1 | Q - B 2 | |
9. O - O |
With this last move White completes his development, while Black is evidently somewhat hampered. A simple examination will suffice to show that White's position {31}is unassailable. There are no weak spots in his armour, and his pieces are ready for any manœuvre that he may wish to carry out in order to begin the attack on the enemy's position. The student should carefully study this example. It will show him that it is sometimes convenient to delay Castling. I have given the moves as they come to my mind without following any standard book on openings. Whether the moves given by me agree or not with the standard works, I do not know, but at the present stage of this book it is not convenient to enter into discussions of mere technicalities which the student will be able to understand when he has become more proficient.
With this last move, White finishes developing his pieces, while Black is clearly a bit restricted. A quick look will show that White's position {31}is completely solid. There are no weaknesses in his setup, and his pieces are ready for any maneuvers he might want to execute to start attacking the enemy's position. Students should take a close look at this example. It will demonstrate that sometimes it's useful to delay castling. I’ve listed the moves as they come to mind without following any specific opening book. I’m not sure if my moves align with the standard texts, but at this stage of the book, it’s not practical to get into discussions about mere technicalities that the student will grasp as they become more skilled.
Example 19.
Example 19.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | P - Q 3 | |
3. P - Q 4 | B - Kt 5 |
A bad move, which violates one of the principles set down, according to which at least one Knight should be developed before the Bishops are brought out, and also because it exchanges a Bishop for a Knight, which in the opening is generally bad, unless there is some compensation.
A poor choice that goes against one of the established principles, stating that at least one Knight should be developed before bringing out the Bishops. It also involves trading a Bishop for a Knight, which is typically a bad move in the opening unless there's some sort of compensation.
4. P × P | B × Kt |
4...P × P loses a Pawn.
4...P × P loses a pawn.
5. Q × B | P × P | |
6. B - Q B 4 | Q - B 3 |
If Kt - B 3; Q - Q Kt 3 wins a Pawn.
If Knight to B3; Queen to Queen Knight 3 wins a pawn.
7. Q - Q Kt 3 | P - Q Kt 3 | |
8. Kt - B 3 | P - Q B 3 |
To prevent Kt - Q 5.
To prevent Kt - Q 5.
Black, however, has no pieces out except his Queen, and White, with a Bishop and a Knight already developed, has a chance of obtaining an advantage quickly by playing Kt - Q 5 anyway. The student is left to work out the many variations arising from this position.
Black, however, has no pieces out except his Queen, and White, with a Bishop and a Knight already developed, has a chance of gaining an advantage quickly by playing Kt - Q 5 anyway. The student is left to figure out the many variations that come from this position.
These examples will show the practical application of the principles previously enunciated. The student is warned against playing Pawns in preference to pieces at the beginning of the game, especially P - K R 3 and P - Q R 3, which are moves very commonly indulged in by beginners.
These examples will demonstrate how to practically apply the principles discussed earlier. Students are advised not to favor pawns over pieces at the start of the game, particularly with moves like P-KR3 and P-QR3, which are often overused by beginners.
8. TRAPS
8. TRAPS
Example 20.
Example 20.
White plays:
White's move:
1. P × P | Kt × P |
Black should have recaptured with the Pawn.
Black should have taken back with the pawn.
2. Kt × Kt | B × Q | |
3. B × P ch | K - K 2 | |
4. Kt - Q 5 mate. |
Example 21.
Example 21.
Black, having the move, should play P - K 3. But suppose he plays Kt - K B 3 instead, then comes—
Black, having the move, should play P - K 3. But suppose he plays Kt - KB 3 instead, then comes—
1. B × P ch |
Kt - K 5 would also give White the advantage, the threat being of course if B × Q; 2 B × P mate. Nor does B - R 5 help matters, because of 2 Q × B, 1... B - K 3 leaves Black with the inferior position. But White's move in the text secures an immediate material advantage, and the beginner at any rate should never miss such an opportunity for the sake of a speculative advantage in position.
Kt - K 5 would also give White the advantage, with the threat being, of course, if B × Q; 2 B × P mate. Nor does B - R 5 improve the situation, because of 2 Q × B, and 1... B - K 3 leaves Black in a worse position. However, White's move in the text secures an immediate material advantage, and beginners, at least, should never overlook such an opportunity for the sake of a speculative positional advantage.
1. ........ | K × B | |
2. Kt - K 5 ch | K moves | |
3. Kt × B |
and White has won a Pawn besides having the better position.
and White has won a pawn while also having the better position.
There are a good many other traps—in fact, there is a book written on traps on the chess board; but the type given above is the most common of all.
There are a lot of other traps—actually, there's a book written about traps on the chessboard; but the type mentioned above is the most common of all.
CHAPTER II
Further Principles in End-Game Play
More Principles in End-Game Play
We shall now go back to the endings in search of a few more principles, then again to the middle-game, and finally to the openings once more, so that the advance may not only be gradual but homogeneous. In this way the foundation on which we expect to build the structure will be firm and solid.
We will now return to the endings to explore a few more principles, then move back to the middle game, and finally revisit the openings again, so that our progress is not only gradual but also consistent. This way, the foundation we plan to build our structure on will be strong and stable.
9. A CARDINAL PRINCIPLE
9. A Key Principle
In the position shown above, White can draw by playing P - Kt 4 according to the general rule that governs such cases, i.e. to advance the Pawn that is free from opposition. But suppose that White, either because he does not know this principle or because he {36}does not, in this case, sufficiently appreciate the value of its application; suppose, we say, that he plays 1 P - Q R 4. Then Black can win by playing 1... P - Q R 4, applying one of the cardinal principles of the high strategy of chess—
In the position shown above, White can secure a draw by playing P - Kt 4, following the general rule that applies in such situations, which is to advance the Pawn that is free from opposition. But let’s say White, either because he doesn’t know this principle or because he doesn't fully understand its importance in this instance, plays 1 P - QR 4 instead. Then Black can win by playing 1... P - QR 4, using one of the key principles of high-level chess strategy—
A unit that holds two.
A unit that holds two.
In this case one Pawn would hold two of the opponent's Pawns. The student cannot lay too much stress on this principle. It can be applied in many ways, and it constitutes one of the principal weapons in the hands of a master.
In this situation, one Pawn would capture two of the opponent's Pawns. The student shouldn't focus too heavily on this principle. It can be used in various ways, and it is one of the key tools a master has at their disposal.
Example 22.—The example given should be sufficient proof. We give a few moves of the main variation:—
Example 22.—The example provided should be enough evidence. We present a few moves from the main variation:—
1. P - R 4 | P - Q R 4 | |
2. K - Kt 2 | K - B 5 | |
(Best; see why.) | ||
3. P - Kt 4 | P × P | |
(Best.) | ||
4. P - R 5 | P - Kt 6 | |
5. P - R 6 | P - Kt 7 | |
6. P - R 7 | P - Kt 8 (Q) | |
7. P - R 8 (Q) | Q - K 5 ch | |
8. Q × Q | K × Q |
10. A CLASSICAL ENDING
A CLASSICAL ENDING
Example 23.—In this position White's best line of defence consists in keeping his Pawn where it stands at R 2. As soon as the Pawn is advanced it becomes easier for Black to win. On the other hand, Black's plan to win (supposing that White does not advance his Pawn) may be divided into three parts. The first part will be to get his King to K R 6, at the same time keeping intact the position of his Pawns. (This is all important, since, in order to win the game, it is essential at the end that Black may be able to advance his rearmost Pawn one or two squares according to the position of the White King.)
Example 23.—In this situation, White's best defense is to keep his Pawn where it is at R 2. Once the Pawn moves forward, it becomes easier for Black to win. On the other hand, Black's strategy to win (assuming White doesn't advance his Pawn) can be broken down into three parts. The first part involves moving his King to K R 6 while also maintaining the position of his Pawns. (This is crucial because, to win the game, Black needs the ability to advance his backmost Pawn one or two squares depending on where the White King is positioned.)
1. K - Kt 3 | K - K 6 | |
2. K - Kt 2 |
2. ........ | K - B 5 | |
3. K - B 2 | K - Kt 5 | |
4. K - Kt 2 | K - R 5 | |
5. K - Kt 1 | K - R 6 |
The first part has been completed.
The first part is done.
The second part will be short and will consist in advancing the R P up the K.
The second part will be brief and will involve moving the R P up the K.
6. K - R 1 | P - R 4 | |
7. K - Kt 1 | P - R 5 |
This ends the second part.
This concludes the second part.
The third part will consist in timing the advance of the Kt P so as to play P - Kt 6 when the White King is at R 1. It now becomes evident how necessary it is to be able to move the Kt P either one or two squares according to the position of the White King, as indicated previously.[2] In this case, as it is White's move, the Pawn will be advanced two squares since the White King will be in the corner, but if it were now Black's move the Kt P should only be advanced one square since the White King is at Kt 1.
The third part will involve timing the advance of the Knight Pawn so that it can move to P - Kt 6 when the White King is at R 1. It’s now clear how important it is to be able to move the Knight Pawn either one or two squares depending on the position of the White King, as mentioned earlier.[2] In this situation, since it’s White’s turn, the Pawn will be advanced two squares because the White King will be in the corner. However, if it were Black’s turn, the Knight Pawn should only be moved up one square since the White King is at Kt 1.
8. K - R 1 | P - Kt 4 | |
9. K - Kt 1 | P - Kt 5 | |
10. K - R 1 | P - Kt 6 | |
11. P × P |
If K - Kt 1, P - Kt 7.
If K - Kt 1, P - Kt 7.
11. ........ | P × P | |
12. K - Kt 1 | P - Kt 7 | |
13. K - B 2 | K - R 7 |
and wins.
and wins.
It is in this analytical way that the student should try to learn. He will thus train his mind to follow a logical sequence in reasoning out any position. This example is excellent training, since it is easy to divide it into three stages and to explain the main point of each part.
The student should try to learn in this analytical way. This will help him develop his mind to follow a logical sequence when reasoning through any situation. This example provides excellent training, as it can be easily divided into three stages, allowing for a clear explanation of the main point in each part.
11. OBTAINING A PASSED PAWN
11. GETTING A CLEARED PAWN
When three or more Pawns are opposed to each other in some such position as the one in Example 24, there is always a chance for one side or the other of obtaining a passed Pawn.
When three or more Pawns are facing each other in a situation like the one in Example 24, there's always a possibility for one side or the other to get a passed Pawn.
Example 24.—In the above position the way of obtaining a passed Pawn is to advance the centre Pawn.
Example 24.—In the above position, the method to create a passed Pawn is to move the center Pawn forward.
1. P - Kt 6 | R P × P | |
If B P × P; P - R 6, | ||
2. P - B 6 | P × B P | |
3. P - R 6 |
1. ........ | P - Kt 3 | |
2. B P × P | B P × P |
It would not be advisable to try to obtain a passed Pawn because the White Pawns would be nearer to Queen than the single Black Pawn.
It wouldn’t be wise to go after a passed Pawn because the White Pawns would be closer to promotion than the single Black Pawn.
3. P × P | P × P |
and the game properly played would be a draw. The student should work this out for himself.
and if the game is played correctly, it would end in a draw. The student should figure this out on his own.
12. HOW TO FIND OUT WHICH PAWN WILL BE FIRST TO QUEEN
12. HOW TO FIND OUT WHICH PAWN WILL BE FIRST TO QUEEN
When two Pawns are free, or will be free, to advance to Queen, you can find out, by counting, which Pawn will be the first to succeed.
When two Pawns are free, or about to be free, to move up to Queen, you can figure out, by counting, which Pawn will be the first to make it.
Example 25.—In this position whoever moves first wins.
Example 25.—In this position, the player who makes the first move wins.
The first thing is to find out, by counting, whether the opposing King can be in time to stop the passed Pawn from Queening. When, as in this case, it cannot be done, the point is to count which Pawn comes in first. In this case the time is the same, but the Pawn that reaches the eighth square first and becomes a Queen is in a position to capture the adversary's Queen when he makes one. Thus:
The first thing to do is count to see if the opposing King can reach the passed Pawn in time to prevent it from becoming a Queen. When, as in this case, it can’t be done, the goal is to determine which Pawn promotes first. In this case, the timing is the same, but the Pawn that gets to the eighth square first and turns into a Queen can capture the opponent's Queen when they promote one. So:
1. P - R 4 | P - K R 4 | |
2. P - R 5 | P - R 5 | |
3. P - Kt 6 | P × P |
Now comes a little calculation. White can capture the Pawn, but if he does so, he will not, when Queening, command the square where Black will also Queen his Pawn. Therefore, instead of taking, he plays:
Now comes a little calculation. White can capture the Pawn, but if he does, he will not, when promoting, control the square where Black will also promote his Pawn. So, instead of taking it, he plays:
4. P - R 6 | P - R 6 | ||
5. P - R 7 | P - R 7 | ||
6. P - R 8 (Q), and wins. |
The student would do well to acquaint himself with various simple endings of this sort, so as to acquire the habit of counting, and thus be able to know with ease when he can or cannot get there first. Once again I must call attention to the fact that a book cannot by itself teach how to play. It can only serve as a guide, and the rest must be learned by experience, and if a teacher can be had at the same time, so much the faster will the student be able to learn. {43}
The student should get familiar with various simple endings like these to develop the ability to count, which will help him easily determine when he can or cannot arrive first. Once again, I must emphasize that a book alone cannot teach you how to play. It can only act as a guide, and the rest has to be learned through experience. If a teacher is available at the same time, the student will learn much faster. {43}
13. THE OPPOSITION
13. THE OPPOSITION
When Kings have to be moved, and one player can, by force, bring his King into a position similar to the one shown in the following diagram, so that his adversary is forced to move and make way for him, the player obtaining that advantage is said to have the opposition.
When Kings need to be maneuvered, and one player can, by force, position his King in a way similar to the one shown in the following diagram, forcing his opponent to move and clear the way for him, the player gaining that advantage is said to have the opposition.
Example 26.—Suppose in the above position White plays
Example 26.—Suppose in the situation described above, White plays
1. K - Q 4 |
Now Black has the option of either opposing the passage of the White King by playing K - Q 3 or, if he prefers, he can pass with his own King by replying K - B 4. Notice that the Kings are directly opposed to each other, and the number of intervening squares between them is odd—one in this case.
Now Black can either block the White King by playing K - Q 3, or if he prefers, he can pass with his own King by responding K - B 4. Notice that the Kings are directly facing each other, and there’s an odd number of squares between them—one in this case.
which can be called actual or close diagonal opposition, or, again, this form:
which can be referred to as actual or close diagonal opposition, or, again, this form:
which can be called actual or close lateral opposition.
which can be referred to as actual or close lateral opposition.
Now, if the student will take the trouble of moving each King backwards as in a game in the same frontal, diagonal or lateral line respectively shown in the diagrams, we shall have what may be called distant frontal, diagonal and lateral opposition respectively.
Now, if the student puts in the effort to move each King backward in the same frontal, diagonal, or lateral line as demonstrated in the diagrams, we will achieve what can be referred to as distant frontal, diagonal, and lateral opposition respectively.
The matter of the opposition is highly important, and takes at times somewhat complicated forms, all of which can be solved mathematically; but, for the present, the student should only consider the most simple forms. (An examination of some of the examples of King and Pawns endings already given will show several cases of close opposition.)
The issue of opposition is very important and can sometimes be a bit complicated, but all of it can be solved mathematically. However, for now, the student should only focus on the simplest forms. (Looking at some of the examples of King and Pawn endings already provided will reveal several cases of close opposition.)
In all simple forms of opposition,
In all basic forms of opposition,
when the Kings are on the same line and the number of intervening squares between them is even, the player who has the move has the opposition.
when the Kings are aligned and the number of squares between them is even, the player who has the turn has the opposition.
Example 27.—The above position shows to advantage the enormous value of the opposition. The {46}position is very simple. Very little is left on the board, and the position, to a beginner, probably looks absolutely even. It is not the case, however. Whoever has the move wins. Notice that the Kings are directly in front of one another, and that the number of intervening squares is even.
Example 27.—The position above clearly illustrates the huge value of the opposition. The {46}position is quite straightforward. There are very few pieces left on the board, and to a beginner, it might seem completely balanced. That's not true, though. The player who has the move wins. Notice that the Kings are directly facing each other, and the number of squares in between is even.
Now as to the procedure to win such a position. The proper way to begin is to move straight up. Thus:
Now, about how to secure such a position. The best way to start is to go straight for it. So:
1. K - K 2 | K - K 2 | |
2. K - K 3 | K - K 3 | |
3. K - K 4 | K - B 3 |
Now White can exercise the option of either playing K - Q 5 and thus passing with his King, or of playing K - B 4 and prevent the Black King from passing, thereby keeping the opposition. Mere counting will show that the former course will only lead to a draw, therefore White takes the latter course and plays:
Now White can choose to either play K - Q 5 and move his King, or play K - B 4 and block the Black King, maintaining the opposition. Simple counting indicates that the first option will only result in a draw, so White takes the second option and plays:
4. K - B 4 | K - Kt 3 |
If 4...K - K 3; 5 K - Kt 5 will win.
If 4...K - K 3; 5 K - Kt 5 will win.
5. K - K 5 | K - Kt 2 |
Now by counting it will be seen that White wins by capturing Black's Knight Pawn.
Now, by counting, it will be clear that White wins by capturing Black's Knight Pawn.
The process has been comparatively simple in the variation given above, but Black has other lines of {47}defence more difficult to overcome. Let us begin anew.
The process has been relatively straightforward in the variation mentioned above, but Black has other defense strategies that are tougher to deal with. Let's start over.
1. K - K 2 | K - Q 1 |
Now if 2 K - Q 3, K - Q 2, or if 2 K - K 3, K - K 2, and Black obtains the opposition in both cases. (When the Kings are directly in front of one another, and the number of intervening squares between the Kings is odd, the player who has moved last has the opposition.)
Now if 2 K - Q 3, K - Q 2, or if 2 K - K 3, K - K 2, and Black gains the opposition in both cases. (When the Kings are directly facing each other, and the number of squares between them is odd, the player who moved last has the opposition.)
Now in order to win, the White King must advance. There is only one other square where he can go, B 3, and that is the right place. Therefore it is seen that in such cases when the opponent makes a so-called waiting move, you must advance, leaving a rank or file free between the Kings. Therefore we have—
Now to win, the White King needs to move forward. There’s only one other square he can go to, B3, and that’s the right move. So, it’s clear that when the opponent makes a so-called waiting move, you have to advance, leaving a row or column open between the Kings. Therefore we have—
2. K - B 3 | K - K 2 |
Now, it would be bad to advance, because then Black, by bringing up his King in front of your King, would obtain the opposition. It is White's turn to play a similar move to Black's first move, viz.:
Now, it wouldn't be wise to move forward, because then Black, by bringing his King in front of your King, would gain the opposition. It's White’s turn to play a move similar to Black’s first move, which is:
3. K - K 3 |
which brings the position back to the first variation shown. The student would do well to familiarise himself with the handling of the King in all examples of opposition. It often means the winning or losing of a game.
which brings the position back to the first variation shown. The student should get to know how to manage the King in all cases of opposition. It often determines whether you win or lose a game.
Example 28.—The following position is an excellent proof of the value of the opposition as a means of defence.
Example 28.—The following position is a great example of how valuable opposition can be as a defensive strategy.
White is a Pawn behind and apparently lost, yet he can manage to draw as follows:
White is a Pawn behind and seemingly out of the game, yet he can still manage to force a draw like this:
1. K - R 1 ! |
The position of the Pawns does not permit White to draw by means of the actual or close opposition, hence he takes the distant opposition: in effect if 1 K - B 1 (actual or close opposition), K - Q 7; 2 K - B 2, K - Q 6 and White cannot continue to keep the lateral opposition essential to his safety, because of his own Pawn at B 3. On the other hand, after the text move, if
The position of the Pawns doesn't allow White to draw by using direct or close opposition, so he opts for the distant opposition: effectively, if 1 K - B 1 (direct or close opposition), K - Q 7; 2 K - B 2, K - Q 6, and White can't maintain the lateral opposition that's crucial for his safety due to his own Pawn at B 3. On the other hand, after the chosen move, if
1. ........ | K - Q 7 | |
2. K - R 2 | K - Q 6 | |
3. K - R 3 ! | K - K 7 | |
{49} | 4. K - Kt 2 | K - K 6 |
5. K - Kt 3 | K - Q 5 | |
6. K - Kt 4 |
attacking the Pawn and forcing Black to play 6... K - K 6 when he can go back to Kt 3 as already shown, and always keep the opposition.
attacking the Pawn and forcing Black to play 6... K - K 6 when he can go back to Kt 3 as already shown, and always keep the opposition.
Going back to the original position, if
Going back to the original position, if
1. K - R 1 | P - Kt 5 |
White does not play P × P, because P - K 5 will win, but plays:
White doesn't play P × P, because P - K 5 will win, but plays:
2. K - Kt 2 | K - Q 7 |
If 2...P × P ch; 3 K × P, followed by K - K 4, will draw.
If 2...P × P, then 3 K × P, followed by K - K 4, will draw.
3. P × P | P - K 5 |
and mere counting will show that both sides Queen, drawing the game.
and simply counting will show that both sides tied, resulting in a draw.
If the student will now take the trouble to go back to the examples of King and Pawns which I have given in this book,[3] he will realise that in all of them the matter of the opposition is of paramount importance; as, in fact, it is in nearly all endings of King and Pawns, except in such cases where the Pawn-position in itself ensures the win.
If the student now takes the time to revisit the examples of King and Pawns that I’ve presented in this book,[3] they will understand that the concept of opposition is incredibly important; this is true in almost all King and Pawn endings, except in situations where the Pawn structure alone guarantees a victory.
14. THE RELATIVE VALUE OF KNIGHT AND BISHOP
14. THE RELATIVE VALUE OF KNIGHT AND BISHOP
Before turning our attention to this matter it is well to state now that two Knights alone cannot mate, but, under certain conditions of course, they can do so if the opponent has one or more Pawns.
Before we focus on this issue, it's important to mention that two Knights alone cannot checkmate, but they can do so under certain conditions if the opponent has one or more Pawns.
Example 29.—In the above position White cannot win, although the Black King is cornered, but in the following position, in which Black has a Pawn,
Example 29.—In the above position, White cannot win, even though the Black King is cornered, but in the following position, where Black has a Pawn,
White wins with or without the move. Thus:
White wins with or without the move. So:
1. Kt - Kt 6 | P - R 5 |
White cannot take the Pawn because the game will be drawn, as explained before.
White can't take the pawn because the game will end in a draw, as explained earlier.
2. Kt - K 5 | P - R 6 | |
3. Kt - B 6 | P - R 7 | |
4. Kt - Kt 5 | P - R 8 (Q) | |
5. Kt - B 7 mate |
The reason for this peculiarity in chess is evident.
The reason for this unusual aspect of chess is clear.
White with the two Knights can only stalemate the King, unless Black has a Pawn which can be moved.
White with the two Knights can only create a stalemate against the King, unless Black has a Pawn that can be moved.
Example 30.—Although he is a Bishop and a Pawn ahead the following position cannot be won by White.
Example 30.—Even though he is a Bishop and a Pawn ahead, White cannot win the following position.
Example 31.—In the above position White with or without the move can win. Take the most difficult variation.
Example 31.—In the above position, White can win whether they have the move or not. Consider the toughest variation.
1. ........ | K - R 7 | |
2. Kt - Kt 4 ch | K - R 8 | |
3. K - B 1 | P - Kt 4 | |
4. K - B 2 | P - R 7 | |
5. Kt - K 3 | P - Kt 5 | |
6. Kt - B 1 | P - Kt 6 ch | |
7. Kt × P mate |
Now that we have seen these exceptional cases, we can analyse the different merits and the relative value of the Knight and the Bishop.
Now that we’ve looked at these exceptional cases, we can analyze the different strengths and the relative value of the Knight and the Bishop.
It is generally thought by amateurs that the Knight is the more valuable piece of the two, the chief reason being that, unlike the Bishop, the Knight can command both Black and White squares. However, the fact is generally overlooked that the Knight, at any one time, {53}has the choice of one colour only. It takes much longer to bring a Knight from one wing to the other. Also, as shown in the following Example, a Bishop can stalemate a Knight; a compliment which the Knight is unable to return.
Amateurs often believe the Knight is the more valuable piece compared to the Bishop, mainly because the Knight can move to both Black and White squares. However, it's often overlooked that the Knight can only choose one color at a time. It takes much longer to move a Knight from one side of the board to the other. Additionally, as demonstrated in the following example, a Bishop can stalemate a Knight, a feat the Knight cannot achieve. {53}
Example 32.
Example 32.
The weaker the player the more terrible the Knight is to him, but as a player increases in strength the value of the Bishop becomes more evident to him, and of course there is, or should be, a corresponding decrease in his estimation of the value of the Knight as compared to the Bishop. In this respect, as in many others, the masters of to-day are far ahead of the masters of former generations. While not so long ago some of the very best amongst them, like Pillsbury and Tchigorin, preferred Knights to Bishops, there is hardly a master of to-day who would not completely agree with the statements made above. {54}
The weaker the player, the more awful the Knight seems to him, but as a player gets stronger, the value of the Bishop becomes clearer, and naturally, he should start to see the Knight as less valuable compared to the Bishop. In this way, as in many others, today's masters are much more advanced than those of past generations. Not too long ago, some of the best players, like Pillsbury and Tchigorin, preferred Knights over Bishops, but nowadays, it's rare to find a master who wouldn’t fully agree with the points made above. {54}
Example 33.—This is about the only case when the Knight is more valuable than the Bishop.
Example 33.—This is one of the few situations when the Knight is more valuable than the Bishop.
It is what is called a "block position," and all the Pawns are on one side of the board. (If there were Pawns on both sides of the board there would be no advantage in having a Knight.) In such a position Black has excellent chances of winning. Of course, there is an extra source of weakness for White in having his Pawns on the same colour-squares as his Bishop. This is a mistake often made by players. The proper way, generally, in an ending, is to have your Pawns on squares of opposite colour to that of your own Bishop. When you have your Pawns on squares of the same colour the action of your own Bishop is limited by them, and consequently the value of the Bishop is diminished, since the value of a piece can often be measured by the number of squares it commands. While on this subject, I shall also call attention to the {55}fact that it is generally preferable to keep your Pawns on squares of the same colour as that of the opposing Bishop, particularly if they are passed Pawns supported by the King. The principles might be stated thus:
It’s what's known as a "block position," where all the Pawns are on one side of the board. (If there were Pawns on both sides, having a Knight wouldn’t offer any advantage.) In this situation, Black has a great chance of winning. Additionally, White has a weakness by having his Pawns on the same color squares as his Bishop. This is a common mistake players make. Typically, in an endgame, you should position your Pawns on squares of the opposite color to your own Bishop. If your Pawns are on squares of the same color, it restricts your Bishop’s movement, thus reducing its effectiveness since the value of a piece is often determined by how many squares it controls. While we're on this topic, I’d also like to point out that it’s usually better to keep your Pawns on squares of the same color as the opposing Bishop, especially if they are passed Pawns supported by the King. The principles can be summarized like this:
When the opponent has a Bishop, keep your Pawns on squares of the same colour as your opponent's Bishop.
When your opponent has a Bishop, keep your Pawns on squares that are the same color as their Bishop.
Whenever you have a Bishop, whether the opponent has also one or not, keep your Pawns on squares of the opposite colour to that of your own Bishop.
Whenever you have a Bishop, whether your opponent has one or not, keep your Pawns on squares of the opposite color to your Bishop.
Naturally, these principles have sometimes to be modified to suit the exigencies of the position.
Naturally, these principles sometimes need to be adjusted to fit the demands of the situation.
Example 34.—In the following position the Pawns are on one side of the board, and there is no advantage in having either a Knight or a Bishop. The game should surely end in a draw.
Example 34.—In this position, the Pawns are on one side of the board, and there’s no advantage in having either a Knight or a Bishop. The game should definitely end in a draw.
Example 35.—Now let us add three Pawns on each side to the above position, so that there are Pawns on both sides of the board.
Example 35.—Now let's add three Pawns on each side to the position above, so that there are Pawns on both sides of the board.
It is now preferable to have the Bishop, though the position, if properly played out, should end in a draw. The advantage of having the Bishop lies as much in its ability to command, at long range, both sides of the board from a central position as in its ability to move quickly from one side of the board to the other.
It’s now better to have the Bishop, even though, if played correctly, the game should result in a draw. The benefit of having the Bishop comes not only from its capability to control both sides of the board from a central spot but also from its speed in moving across the board.
Example 36.—In the above position it is unquestionably an advantage to have the Bishop, because, although each player has the same number of Pawns, they are not balanced on each side of the board. Thus, on the King's side, White has three to two, while on the Queen's side it is Black that has three to two. Still, with proper play, the game should end in a draw, though White has somewhat better chances.
Example 36.—In this position, having the Bishop is definitely an advantage, because even though both players have the same number of Pawns, they aren't evenly distributed on the board. On the King's side, White has three Pawns to Black's two, while on the Queen's side, Black has three Pawns to White's two. However, with the right strategy, the game should end in a draw, although White has slightly better chances.
Example 38.—Again Black would have great difficulty in drawing this position.
Example 38.—Once again, Black would struggle to figure out this position.
The student should carefully consider these positions. I hope that the many examples will help him to understand, in their true value, the relative merits of the Knight and Bishop. As to the general method of procedure, a teacher, or practical experience, will be best. I might say generally, however, that the proper course in these endings, as in all similar endings, is: Advance of the King to the centre of the board or towards the passed Pawns, or Pawns that are susceptible of being attacked, and rapid advance of the passed Pawn or Pawns as far as is consistent with their safety.
The student should carefully think about these positions. I hope that the many examples will help him to truly understand the relative strengths of the Knight and Bishop. As for the general approach, learning from a teacher or practical experience will be most effective. I can generally say, though, that the right strategy in these endgames, like in all similar situations, is to move the King toward the center of the board or towards the passed Pawns, or to Pawns that can be attacked, and to quickly advance the passed Pawn or Pawns as far as is safe.
15. HOW TO MATE WITH A KNIGHT AND A BISHOP
15. HOW TO CHECKMATE WITH A KNIGHT AND A BISHOP
Now, before going back again to the middle-game and the openings, let us see how to mate with Knight and Bishop, and, then, how to win with a Queen against a Rook.
Now, before we return to the middle game and the openings, let's look at how to checkmate with a Knight and Bishop, and then how to win with a Queen against a Rook.
With a Knight and a Bishop the mate can only be given in the corners of the same colour as the Bishop.
With a Knight and a Bishop, checkmate can only happen in the corners that match the color of the Bishop.
Example 39.—In this example we must mate either at Q R 1 or K R 8. The ending can be divided into two parts. Part one consists in driving the Black King to the last line. We might begin, as is generally done in all such cases, by advancing the King to the centre of the board:
Example 39.—In this example, we need to checkmate either at Q R 1 or K R 8. The ending can be broken down into two parts. Part one involves forcing the Black King to the last rank. We can start, as is usually done in these situations, by moving the King to the center of the board:
1. K - K 2 | K - Q 2 |
Black, in order to make it more difficult, goes towards the white-squared corner:
Black, to make it more challenging, heads toward the white-squared corner:
2. K - Q 3 | K - B 3 | |
3. B - B 4 | K - Q 4 | |
{60} | 4. Kt - K 2 | K - B 4 |
5. Kt - B 3 | K - Kt 5 | |
6. K - Q 4 | K - R 4 | |
7. K - B 5 | K - R 3 | |
8. K - B 6 | K - R 2 | |
9. Kt - Q 5 | K - R 1 |
The first part is now over; the Black King is in the white-squared corner.
The first part is now over; the Black King is in the white corner.
The second and last part will consist in driving the Black King now from Q R 8 to Q R 1 or K R 8 in order to mate him. Q R 1 will be the quickest in this position.
The second and final part will involve moving the Black King from Q R 8 to Q R 1 or K R 8 to checkmate him. Q R 1 will be the fastest move in this position.
10. Kt - Kt 6 ch | K - R 2 | |
11. B - B 7 | K - R 3 | |
12. B - Kt 8 | K - R 4 | |
13. Kt - Q 5 | K - R 5 |
Black tries to make for K R 1 with his King. White has two ways to prevent that, one by 14 B - K 5, {61}K - Kt 6; 15 Kt - K 3, and the other which I give as the text, and which I consider better for the student to learn, because it is more methodical and more in accord with the spirit of all these endings, by using the King as much as possible.
Black tries to move his King to K R 1. White has two ways to stop that: one is by 14 B - K 5, {61}K - Kt 6; 15 Kt - K 3, and the other is what I present as the main suggestion, which I think is better for the student to understand, because it’s more systematic and aligns more with the approach for all these endings, by using the King as much as possible.
14. K - B 5 ! | K - Kt 6 | |
15. Kt - Kt 4 | K - B 6 | |
16. B - B 4 | K - Kt 6 | |
17. B - K 5 | K - R 5 | |
18. K - B 4 | K - R 4 | |
19. B - B 7 ch | K - R 5 | |
20. Kt - Q 3 | K - R 6 | |
21. B - Kt 6 | K - R 5 | |
22. Kt - Kt 2 ch | K - R 6 | |
23. K - B 3 | K - R 7 | |
24. K - B 2 | K - R 6 | |
25. B - B 5 ch | K - R 7 | |
26. Kt - Q 3 | K - R 8 | |
27. B - Kt 4 | K - R 7 | |
28. Kt - B 1 ch | K - R 8 | |
29. B - B 3 mate |
It will be seen that the ending is rather laborious. There are two outstanding features: the close following by the King, and the controlling of the squares of opposite colour to the Bishop by the combined action of the Knight and King. The student would do well to exercise himself methodically in this ending, as it gives a very good idea of the actual power of the pieces, and it requires foresight in order to accomplish the {62}mate within the fifty moves which are granted by the rules.
The ending is quite complex. There are two key aspects: the King closely following, and the Knight and King working together to control the squares of opposite color to the Bishop. It’s a good idea for the student to practice this ending systematically, as it provides a solid understanding of the actual power of the pieces and requires foresight to achieve the {62}mate within the fifty moves allowed by the rules.
16. QUEEN AGAINST ROOK
Queen vs. Rook
This is one of the most difficult endings without Pawns. The resources of the defence are many, and when used skilfully only a very good player will prevail within the limit of fifty moves allowed by the rules. (The rule is that at any moment you may demand that your opponent mate you within fifty moves. However, every time a piece is exchanged or a Pawn advanced the counting must begin afresh.)
This is one of the toughest endings without Pawns. The defense has plenty of options, and if used wisely, only a really strong player can win within the fifty-move limit set by the rules. (The rule states that you can ask your opponent to mate you within fifty moves at any time. However, every time a piece is exchanged or a Pawn is moved, the count must start over.)
Example 40.—This is one of the standard positions which Black can often bring about. Now, it is White's move. If it were Black's move it would be simple, as he would have to move his Rook away from the King (find out why), and then the Rook would be {63}comparatively easy to win. We deduce from the above that the main object is to force the Black Rook away from the defending King, and that, in order to compel Black to do so, we must bring about the position in the diagram with Black to move. Once we know what is required, the way to proceed becomes easier to find. Thus:
Example 40.—This is one of the standard positions that Black can often achieve. Now, it's White's turn. If it were Black's turn, it would be straightforward, as Black would need to move his Rook away from the King (find out why), making it relatively easy to win the Rook. From this, we conclude that the main goal is to force the Black Rook away from the defending King, and to do this, we need to create the position shown in the diagram with Black to move. Once we understand what is needed, finding the next steps becomes simpler. Thus:
1. Q - K 5 ch |
Not 1 Q - R 6, because R - B 2 ch; 2 K - Kt 6, R - B 3 ch; 3 K × R. Stalemate. (The beginner will invariably fall into this trap.)
Not 1 Q - R 6, because R - B 2 ch; 2 K - Kt 6, R - B 3 ch; 3 K × R. Stalemate. (The beginner will invariably fall into this trap.)
1. ........ | K to R 1 or to R 2 | |
2. Q - R 1 ch | K - Kt 1 | |
3. Q - R 5 |
In a few moves we have accomplished our object. The first part is concluded. Now we come to the second part. The Rook can only go to a White square, otherwise the first check with the Queen will win it. Therefore
In just a few moves, we've achieved our goal. The first part is complete. Now, let's move on to the second part. The Rook can only move to a White square; otherwise, the first check with the Queen will take it. Therefore
3. ........ | R - Kt 6 | |
4. Q - K 5 ch | K - R 1 best | |
5. Q - R 8 ch | K - R 2 | |
6. Q - Kt 7 ch | K - R 1 | |
7. Q - Kt 8 ch | R - Kt 1 | |
8. Q - R 2 mate |
Example 41.—The procedure here is very similar. The things to bear in mind are that the Rook must be prevented from interposing at Kt 1 because of an immediate mate, and in the same way the King must be prevented from going either to R 3 or B 1.
Example 41.—The process here is pretty similar. It's important to remember that the Rook needs to be blocked from stepping in at Kt 1 due to an immediate checkmate threat, and likewise, the King has to be stopped from moving to either R 3 or B 1.
Example 42.—We shall now examine a more difficult position.
Example 42.—Now, we'll take a look at a more challenging situation.
Many players would be deceived by this position. The most likely looking move is not the best. Thus suppose we begin
Many players would be misled by this position. The most obvious move isn't the best one. So let's say we start
1. Q - K 5 ch | K - B 1 | |
2. K - Kt 6 | R - Q 2 |
The only defence, but, unfortunately, a very effective one, which makes it very difficult for White, since he cannot play 3 Q - K 6 because of 3...R - Kt 2 ch; 4 K - B 6, R - Kt 3 ch draws. Nor can he win quickly by 3 Q - Q B 5 ch because 3...K - K 1, 4 K - B 6, R - Q 3 ch ! driving back the White King.
The only defense, though unfortunately very effective, makes it tough for White, since he can't play 3 Q - K 6 due to 3...R - Kt 2 check; 4 K - B 6, R - Kt 3 check results in a draw. He also can't win quickly by playing 3 Q - QB 5 check because 3...K - K 1, 4 K - B 6, R - Q 3 check drives the White King back.
Now that we have seen the difficulties of the situation let us go back. The best move is
Now that we've looked at the challenges of the situation, let's go back. The best move is
1. Q - Kt 5 ch ! | K - R 1 |
If K - R 2; 2 Q - Kt 6 ch, K - R 1; 3 K - R 6 !
If K - R 2; 2 Q - Kt 6 ch, K - R 1; 3 K - R 6 !
2. Q - K 5 ch ! | K - R 2 best | |
3. K - Kt 5 | R - R 2 ! best |
If 3...R - Kt 2 ch; 4 K - B 6 leads to a position similar to those in Examples 40 and 41.
If 3...R - Kt 2 ch; 4 K - B 6 results in a position similar to those in Examples 40 and 41.
4. Q - K 4 ch | K - Kt 1 | |
5. Q - B 4 ch | K - R 2 | |
6. K - B 6 | R - K Kt 2 | |
7. Q - R 4 ch | K - Kt 1 | |
8. Q - R 5 |
and we have the position of Example 40 with Black to move.
and we have the position of Example 40 with Black to play.
Let us go back again.
Let's go back again.
1. Q - Kt 5 ch | K - B 1 | |
2. Q - Q 8 ch | K - Kt 2 | |
3. K - Kt 5 | R - B 6 |
The best place for the Rook away from the King. 3...K - R 2; 4 Q - Q 4, R - Kt 2 ch; 5 K - B 6 would lead to positions similar to those already seen.
The best spot for the Rook away from the King. 3...K - R 2; 4 Q - Q 4, R - Kt 2 ch; 5 K - B 6 would lead to positions similar to those we've already seen.
4. Q - Q 4 ch | K - B 1 | |
5. K - Kt 6 |
5 Q - Q 6 ch, K - Kt 2; 6 Q - K 5 ch, K - B 1; 7 K - Kt 6 would also win the Rook. The text move, however, is given to show the finesse of such endings. White now threatens mate at Q 8.
5 Q - Q 6 ch, K - Kt 2; 6 Q - K 5 ch, K - B 1; 7 K - Kt 6 would also win the Rook. The move shown in the text, however, is used to illustrate the skill involved in such endings. White now threatens checkmate at Q 8.
5. ........ | R - Kt 6 ch | |
6. K - B 6 | R - B 6 ch | |
7. K - K 6 | R - K R 6 |
White threatened mate at K R 8.
White threatened checkmate at K R 8.
8. Q - B 4 ch |
and the Rook is lost.
and the rook is lost.
Note, in these examples, that the checks at long range along the diagonals have often been the key to all the winning manœuvres. Also that the Queen and {67}King are often kept on different lines. The student should carefully go over these positions and consider all the possibilities not given in the text.
Note, in these examples, that the checks at long range along the diagonals have often been the key to all the winning maneuvers. Also, the Queen and {67}King are often kept on different lines. The student should carefully review these positions and think about all the possibilities not covered in the text.
He should once more go through everything already written before proceeding further with the book.
He should review everything he's already written before moving on with the book.
CHAPTER III
Planning a Win in Middle-Game Play
Planning a Win in Mid-Game Play
I shall now give a few winning positions taken from my own games. I have selected those that I believe can be considered as types, i.e. positions that may easily occur again in a somewhat similar form. A knowledge of such positions is of great help; in fact, one cannot know too many. It often may help the player to find, with little effort, the right move, which he might not be able to find at all without such knowledge.
I will now share some winning positions taken from my own games. I've chosen those that I think can be seen as types, meaning positions that could easily arise again in a similar way. Understanding these positions is very useful; in fact, you can never know too many. It often helps the player to quickly find the right move, something they might struggle with without this knowledge.
17. ATTACKING WITHOUT THE AID OF KNIGHTS
17. ATTACKING WITHOUT THE HELP OF KNIGHTS
Example 43.—It is Black's move, and as he is a Kt and P behind he must win quickly, if at all. He plays:
Example 43.—It's Black's turn to move, and since he's down a knight and a pawn, he needs to win quickly, if he can. He plays:
1. ........ | Q R - Kt 1 ! | |
2. R - B 2 |
If, Q × Q, R × P ch; K - R 1, B - Q 4 and mate follows in a few moves.
If, Q × Q, R × P ch; K - R 1, B - Q 4 and checkmate follows in a few moves.
2. ........ | R × P ch | |
3. K - B 1 | B - B 5 ch | |
4. Kt × B | R - Kt 8 mate |
1. R × P ch | Q × R | |
2. R - Q R 5 | Black moves | |
3. White mates |
Example 45.—White has a beautiful position, but still he had better gain some material, if he can, before Black consolidates his defensive position. He therefore plays:
Example 45.—White has a great position, but he should try to gain some material, if possible, before Black strengthens his defense. So he plays:
1. R × Kt ! | P × R | |
2. B × P ch | K - K 2 |
If Kt × B; R × Kt and Black would be helpless.
If Kt × B; R × Kt, then Black would be powerless.
3. Q - R 7 ch | K - K 1 | |
4. Q × Kt ch | K - Q 2 | |
5. Q - R 7 ch | Q - K 2 | |
6. B - B 8 | Q × Q | |
7. R × Q ch | K - K 1 | |
8. R × R | Resigns |
18. ATTACKING WITH KNIGHTS AS A PROMINENT FORCE
18. USING KNIGHTS AS A KEY ATTACK FORCE
Example 46.—White is two Pawns behind. He must therefore press on his attack. The game continues:
Example 46.—White is two pawns behind. He must therefore push forward with his attack. The game continues:
1. Kt (B 5) × Kt P | Kt - B 4 |
Evidently an error which made the winning easier for White, as he simply took the Rook with the Knight and kept up the attack. Black should have played: 1 ... Kt × Kt. Then would have followed: 2 Kt - B 6 ch, K - Kt 3; 3 Kt × B, P - B 3 (best); 4 P - K 5, K - B 2; 5 Kt × P, R - K 2; 6 Kt - K 4, and Black should lose.[4]
Clearly, there was a mistake that made it easier for White to win, as he simply captured the Rook with the Knight and continued the attack. Black should have played: 1 ... Kt × Kt. Then it would go: 2 Kt - B 6 ch, K - Kt 3; 3 Kt × B, P - B 3 (best); 4 P - K 5, K - B 2; 5 Kt × P, R - K 2; 6 Kt - K 4, and Black is likely to lose. [4]
Example 47.—The student should carefully examine the position, as the sacrifice of the Bishop in similar situations is typical, and the chance for it is of frequent occurrence in actual play. The game continues:
Example 47.—The student should closely look at the position, as sacrificing the Bishop in similar situations is common, and it often comes up in real games. The game continues:
1. B × P ch | K × B | |
2. Kt - Kt 5 ch | K - Kt 3 |
Best. If 2...K - R 3; 3 Kt × P ch wins the Queen, and if 2...K - Kt 1; 3 Q - R 5, with an irresistible attack.
Best. If 2...K - R 3; 3 Kt × P ch wins the Queen, and if 2...K - Kt 1; 3 Q - R 5, with an unstoppable attack.
3. Q - Kt 4 | P - B 4 | |
4. Q - Kt 3 | K - R 3 |
White finally won.[5]
White finally won.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
19. WINNING BY INDIRECT ATTACK
19. WINNING WITH INDIRECT ATTACK
We have so far given positions where the attacks were of a violent nature and directed against the King's position. Very often, however, in the middle-game attacks are made against a position or against pieces, or even Pawns.
We have so far discussed situations where the attacks were violent and aimed at the King's position. However, in the middle game, it’s common for attacks to target a position, pieces, or even Pawns.
The winning of a Pawn among good players of even strength often means the winning of the game.
Getting a Pawn ahead among evenly matched players usually means winning the game.
Hence the study of such positions is of great importance. We give below two positions in which the attack aims at the gain of a mere Pawn as a means of ultimately winning the game.
Therefore, studying these positions is really important. Below, we present two positions where the attack focuses on gaining just a Pawn as a way to eventually win the game.
Example 48.—Black is a Pawn behind, and there is no violent direct attack against White's King. Black's pieces, however, are very well placed and free to act, and by co-ordinating the action of all his pieces he is soon able not only to regain the Pawn but to obtain the better game. The student should carefully {74}consider this position and the subsequent moves. It is a very good example of proper co-ordination in the management of forces. The game continues:
Example 48.—Black has a Pawn behind, and there isn't any direct threat to White's King. However, Black's pieces are well positioned and ready to act. By coordinating all his pieces, he can not only reclaim the Pawn but also secure a stronger position. The student should take a moment to consider this position and the upcoming moves. It serves as a great example of effective coordination in managing forces. The game continues:
1. ........ | R - R 1 | |
2. P - Q R 4 |
White's best move was P - Q Kt 3, when would follow Kt × B; 3 Q × Kt, R - R 6 and Black would ultimately win the Q R P, always keeping a slight advantage in position. The text move makes matters easier.
White's best move was P - Q Kt 3, after which Kt × B would follow; 3 Q × Kt, R - R 6 and Black would eventually win the Q R P, consistently maintaining a slight positional advantage. The current move makes things simpler.
2. ........ | Kt × B | |
3. Q × Kt | Q - B 5 | |
4. K R - Q 1 | K R - Kt 1 |
Black could have regained the Pawn by playing B × Kt, but he sees that there is more to be had, and therefore increases the pressure against White's Queen side. He now threatens, among other things, R × Kt P.
Black could have taken back the Pawn by playing B × Kt, but he realizes there's more to gain, so he ramps up the pressure on White's Queen side. Now he threatens, among other things, R × Kt P.
5. Q - K 3 | R - Kt 5 |
Threatening to win the exchange by B - Q 5.
Threatening to win the exchange with B - Q 5.
6. Q - Kt 5 | B - Q 5 ch | |
7. K - R 1 | Q R - Kt 1 |
This threatens to win the Kt, and thus forces White to give up the exchange.
This risks winning the Kt, which forces White to give up the exchange.
8. R × B | Q × R | |
9. R - Q 1 | Q - B 5 |
Example 49.—An examination of this position will show that Black's main weakness lies in the exposed position of his King, and in the fact that his Q R has not yet come into the game. Indeed, if it were Black's move, we might conclude that he would have the better game, on account of having three Pawns to two on the Queen's side, and his Bishop commanding the long diagonal.
Example 49.—Looking at this situation, we can see that Black's main weakness is the exposed position of his King and that his Queen's Rook hasn't joined the game yet. In fact, if it were Black's turn to move, we might say he would have a stronger position because he has three Pawns compared to two on the Queen's side, and his Bishop controls the long diagonal.
It is, however, White's move, and he has two courses to choose from. The obvious move, B - B 4, might be good enough, since after 1 B - B 4, Q R - Q 1; 2 P - Q Kt 4 would make it difficult for Black. But there is another move which completely upsets Black's position and wins a Pawn, besides obtaining the better position. That move is Kt - Q 4 ! The game continues as follows:
It’s White's turn, and he has two options to consider. The obvious move, B - B 4, might be good enough, since after 1 B - B 4, Q R - Q 1; 2 P - Q Kt 4 would make things tough for Black. But there’s another move that totally disrupts Black’s position and wins a pawn while also getting a better position. That move is Kt - Q 4! The game continues like this:
1. Kt - Q 4 ! | P × Kt | |
2. R × B | Kt - Kt 5 |
There is nothing better, as White threatened B - B 4.
There’s nothing better, as White threatened B - B 4.
3. B - B 4 ch | K - R 1 | |
4. R - K 6 | P - Q 6 | |
5. R × P |
And White, with the better position, is a Pawn ahead.
And White, having the better position, is one Pawn ahead.
These positions have been given with the idea of acquainting the student with different types of combinations. I hope they will also help to develop his imagination, a very necessary quality in a good player. The student should note, in all these middle-game positions, that—
These positions are provided to introduce the student to various types of combinations. I hope they will also foster their imagination, which is an essential quality for a good player. The student should observe, in all these middle-game positions, that—
once the opportunity is offered, all the pieces are thrown into action "en masse" when necessary; and that all the pieces smoothly co-ordinate their action with machine-like precision.
Once the opportunity arises, everything is set in motion "all at once" when needed; and that everything works together seamlessly with machine-like precision.
That, at least, is what the ideal middle-game play should be, if it is not so altogether in these examples.
That’s what ideal middle-game play should look like, even if it’s not fully represented in these examples.
CHAPTER IV
General Theory
General Theory
Before we revert to the technique of the openings it will be advisable to dwell a little on general theory, so that the openings in their relation to the rest of the game may be better understood.
Before we go back to discussing opening techniques, it's a good idea to spend some time on general theory, so that the openings can be better understood in relation to the rest of the game.
20. THE INITIATIVE
20. THE INITIATIVE
As the pieces are set on the board both sides have the same position and the same amount of material. White, however, has the move, and the move in this case means the initiative, and the initiative, other things being equal, is an advantage. Now this advantage must be kept as long as possible, and should only be given up if some other advantage, material or positional, is obtained in its place. White, according to the principles already laid down, develops his pieces as fast as possible, but in so doing he also tries to hinder his opponent's development, by applying pressure wherever possible. He tries first of all to control the centre, and failing this to obtain some positional advantage that will make it possible for him to keep on harassing the enemy. He only relinquishes the initiative when he gets for it some material advantage under such favourable conditions as to make him feel {78}assured that he will, in turn, be able to withstand his adversary's thrust; and finally, through his superiority of material, once more resume the initiative, which alone can give him the victory. This last assertion is self-evident, since, in order to win the game, the opposing King must be driven to a position where he is attacked without having any way of escape. Once the pieces have been properly developed the resulting positions may vary in character. It may be that a direct attack against the King is in order; or that it is a case of improving a position already advantageous; or, finally, that some material can be gained at the cost of relinquishing the initiative for a more or less prolonged period.
As the pieces are set on the board, both sides have the same setup and the same number of pieces. However, White has the first move, and having the first move means the initiative, which is an advantage if everything else is equal. This advantage should be maintained for as long as possible, and should only be given up if another advantage, whether material or positional, is gained in return. White, following the established principles, develops his pieces as quickly as possible while also trying to disrupt his opponent's development by applying pressure whenever he can. He aims to control the center first, and if that doesn't happen, to secure some positional advantage that allows him to keep attacking. He only gives up the initiative when he gains some material advantage under conditions that make him confident he can withstand his opponent’s attacks; and eventually, through superior material, regain the initiative, which is crucial for winning the game. This last point is obvious, as to win the game, the opposing King must be forced into a position where he is attacked with no escape. Once the pieces are properly developed, the resulting positions can vary significantly. It may require a direct attack on the King; it could involve improving a position that is already favorable; or, finally, it might involve gaining some material at the cost of losing the initiative for some time.
21. DIRECT ATTACKS EN MASSE
21. Mass Direct Attacks
In the first case the attack must be carried on with sufficient force to guarantee its success. Under no consideration must a direct attack against the King be carried on à outrance unless there is absolute certainty in one's own mind that it will succeed, since failure in such cases means disaster.
In the first case, the attack must be executed with enough force to ensure its success. Under no circumstances should a direct attack against the King be carried out à outrance unless there is complete certainty in one's own mind that it will succeed, because failure in such cases results in disaster.
Example 50.—A good example of a successful direct attack against the King is shown in the following diagram:
Example 50.—A great example of an effective direct attack against the King is illustrated in the following diagram:
In this position White could simply play B - B 2 and still have the better position, but instead he prefers an immediate attack on the King's side, with {79}the certainty in his mind that the attack will lead to a win. The game continues thus:[6]
In this position, White could just play B - B2 and still have the better position, but instead, he opts for an immediate attack on the King's side, confident that the attack will lead to a win. The game continues like this:[6]
12. B × P ch | K × B | |
13. Kt - Kt 5 ch | K - Kt 3 | |
14. Q - Kt 4 | P - B 4 |
Best. P - K 4 would have been immediately fatal. Thus: 14...P - K 4; 15 Kt - K 6 ch, K - B 3; 16 P - B 4 ! P - K 5; 17 Q - Kt 5 ch, K × Kt; 18 Q - K 5 ch, K - Q 2; 19 K R - Q 1 ch, Kt - Q 6; 20 Kt × P, K - B 3 (if K - K 1, Kt - Q 6 ch wins the Queen); 21 R × Kt, Q × R; 22 R - B 1 ch, K - Kt 3 (if K - Q 2 mate in two); 23 Q - B 7 ch and mate in five moves.
Best. P-K4 would have been immediately fatal. So: 14...P-K4; 15 K-K6 check, K-B3; 16 P-B4! P-K5; 17 Q-K5 check, KxK; 18 Q-K5 check, K-Q2; 19 K-RQ1 check, Kt-Q6; 20 Kt×P, K-B3 (if K-K1, Kt-Q6 check wins the Queen); 21 R×Kt, Q×R; 22 R-B1 check, K-Kt3 (if K-Q2 it's mate in two); 23 Q-B7 check and mate in five moves.
15. Q - Kt 3 | K - R 3 | |
16. Q - R 4 ch | K - Kt 3 | |
17. Q - R 7 ch | K - B 3 |
If K × Kt; Q × Kt P ch and mate in a few moves.
If K × Kt; Q × Kt P ch and checkmate in a few moves.
18. P - K 4 | Kt - Kt 3 | |
19. P × P | P × P | |
20. Q R - Q 1 | Kt - Q 6 | |
21. Q - R 3 | Kt (Q 6) - B 5 | |
22. Q - Kt 3 | Q - B 2 | |
23. K R - K 1 | Kt - K 7 ch |
This blunder loses at once, but the game could not be saved in any case; e.g. 23...B - K 3; 24 R × B ch, Kt × R; 25 Kt - Q 5 mate.
This mistake costs the game immediately, but it couldn't have been saved anyway; for example, 23...B - K 3; 24 R × B ch, Kt × R; 25 Kt - Q 5 mate.
24. R × Kt | Q × Q | |
25. Kt - R 7 ch | K - B 2 | |
26. R P × Q | R - R 1 | |
27. Kt - Kt 5 ch | K - B 3 | |
28. P - B 4 | Resigns |
Example 51.—Another example of this kind:
Example 51.—Here's another example of this type:
In the above position the simple move Kt × P would win, but White looks for complications and their beauties. Such a course is highly risky until a wide experience of actual master-play has developed a sufficient insight into all the possibilities of a position. This game, which won the brilliancy prize at St. Petersburg in 1914, continued as follows:—
In the position described, the straightforward move Kt × P would secure a win, but White is instead looking for complications and their appeal. This approach is very risky unless one has extensive experience from actual master-play that provides a good understanding of all the possibilities in a position. This game, which won the brilliancy prize at St. Petersburg in 1914, continued as follows:—
21. B - R 4 | Q - Q 2 | |
22. Kt × B | Q × R | |
23. Q - Q 8 ch | Q - K 1 |
If K - B 2; 24 Kt - Q 6 ch, King moves; 25 mate.
If K - B 2; 24 Kt - Q 6 ch, King moves; 25 mate.
24. B - K 7 ch | K - B 2 | |
25. Kt - Q 6 ch | K - Kt 3 | |
26. Kt - R 4 ch | K - R 4 |
If 26...K - R 3; 27 Kt (Q 6) - B 5 ch, K - R 4; 28 Kt × P ch, K - R 3; 29 Kt (R 4) - B 5 ch, K - Kt 3; 30 Q - Q 6 ch and mate next move.
If 26...K - R 3; 27 Kt (Q 6) - B 5 check, K - R 4; 28 Kt x P check, K - R 3; 29 Kt (R 4) - B 5 check, K - Kt 3; 30 Q - Q 6 check and checkmate next move.
27. Kt × Q | R × Q | |
28. Kt × P ch | K - R 3 | |
29. Kt (Kt 7) - B 5 ch | K - R 4 | |
30. P - K R 3 ! |
The climax of the combination started with 21 B - R 4. White is still threatening mate, and the best way to avoid it is for Black to give back all the material he has gained and to remain three Pawns behind.
The climax of the combination started with 21 B - R 4. White is still threatening checkmate, and the best way for Black to avoid it is to give back all the material he gained and stay three Pawns behind.
The student should note that in the examples given the attack is carried out with every available piece, {82}and that often, as in some of the variations pointed out, it is the coming into action of the last available piece that finally overthrows the enemy. It demonstrates the principle already stated:
The student should notice that in the examples provided, the attack is executed with every available piece, {82} and that often, as seen in some of the variations mentioned, it is the activation of the last available piece that ultimately defeats the enemy. This illustrates the principle previously stated:
Direct and violent attacks against the King must be carried en masse, with full force, to ensure their success. The opposition must be overcome at all cost; the attack cannot be broken off, since in all such cases that means defeat.
Direct and violent attacks against the King must be carried en masse, with full force, to ensure their success. The opposition must be overcome at all cost; the attack cannot be broken off, since in all such cases that means defeat.
22. THE FORCE OF THE THREATENED ATTACK
22. THE FORCE OF THE THREATENED ATTACK
Failing an opportunity, in the second case, for direct attack, one must attempt to increase whatever weakness there may be in the opponent's position; or, if there is none, one or more must be created. It is always an advantage to threaten something, but such threats must be carried into effect only if something is to be gained immediately. For, holding the threat in hand, forces the opponent to provide against its execution and to keep material in readiness to meet it. Thus he may more easily overlook, or be unable to parry, a thrust at another point. But once the threat is carried into effect, it exists no longer, and your opponent can devote his attention to his own schemes. One of the best and most successful manœuvres in this type of game is to make a demonstration on one side, so as to draw the forces of your opponent to that side, then through the greater mobility of your pieces to shift your forces quickly {83}to the other side and break through, before your opponent has had the time to bring over the necessary forces for the defence.
If you miss an opportunity for a direct attack, you should try to exploit any weaknesses in your opponent's position, or create some if there aren't any. It's always beneficial to threaten something, but you should only follow through if there's something to gain right away. Holding onto the threat forces your opponent to prepare for it and keep resources ready to counter it. This can make them more likely to overlook or struggle to defend against an attack elsewhere. However, once you act on that threat, it's gone, and your opponent can focus on their own plans. One of the best and most effective strategies in this kind of situation is to create a diversion on one side to draw your opponent's forces there, then quickly move your own pieces to the other side and break through before they can reposition their defenses.
A good example of positional play is shown in the following game:
A great example of positional play is demonstrated in the following game:
Example 52.—Played at the Havana International Masters Tournament, 1913. (French Defence.) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: R. Blanco.
Example 52.—Played at the Havana International Masters Tournament, 1913. (French Defense.) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: R. Blanco.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 3 | |
2. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
3. Kt - Q B 3 | P × P | |
4. Kt × P | Kt - Q 2 | |
5. Kt - K B 3 | K Kt - B 3 | |
6. Kt × Kt ch | Kt × Kt | |
7. Kt - K 5 |
This move was first shown to me by the talented Venezuelan amateur, M. Ayala. The object is to {84}prevent the development of Black's Queen's Bishop viâ Q Kt 2, after P - Q Kt 3, which is Black's usual development in this variation. Generally it is bad to move the same piece twice in an opening before the other pieces are out, and the violation of that principle is the only objection that can be made to this move, which otherwise has everything to recommend it.
This move was first taught to me by the skilled Venezuelan amateur, M. Ayala. The goal is to {84}stop the development of Black's Queen's Bishop via Q Kt 2, after P - Q Kt 3, which is Black's typical strategy in this variation. It's usually not a good idea to move the same piece twice in an opening before bringing out the other pieces, and that's the only drawback to this move, which otherwise has a lot going for it.
7. ........ | B - Q 3 | |
8. Q - B 3 |
B - K Kt 5 might be better. The text move gives Black an opportunity of which he does not avail himself
B - Kt 5 might be better. The text move gives Black a chance that he does not take.
8. ........ | P - B 3 |
P - B 4 was the right move. It would have led to complications, in which Black might have held his own; at least, White's play would be very difficult. The text move accomplishes nothing, and puts Black {85}in an altogether defensive position. The veiled threat B × Kt; followed by Q - R 4 ch; is easily met.
P - B 4 was the right move. It could have led to complications where Black might have held his ground; at the very least, White's play would have been quite challenging. The current move doesn't achieve anything and forces Black {85}into a completely defensive stance. The hidden threat B × Kt; followed by Q - R 4 ch; can be easily countered.
9. P - B 3 | O - O | |
10. B - K Kt 5 | B - K 2 |
The fact that Black has now to move his Bishop back clearly demonstrates that Black's plan of development is faulty. He has lost too much time, and White brings his pieces into their most attacking position without hindrance of any sort.
The fact that Black now has to move his Bishop back clearly shows that Black's development plan is flawed. He has wasted too much time, and White is able to position his pieces for an attack without any obstacles.
11. B - Q 3 | Kt - K 1 |
The alternative was Kt - Q 4. Otherwise White would play Q - R 3, and Black would be forced to play P - K Kt 3 (not P - K R 3, because of the sacrifice B × P), seriously weakening his King's side.
The alternative was Kt - Q 4. Otherwise, White would play Q - R 3, and Black would be forced to play P - K Kt 3 (not P - K R 3, because of the sacrifice B × P), seriously weakening his King's side.
12. Q - R 3 | P - K B 4 |
White has no longer an attack, but he has compelled Black to create a marked weakness. Now White's whole plan will be to exploit this weakness (the weak K P), and the student can now see how the principles expounded previously are applied in this game. Every move is directed to make the weak King's Pawn untenable, or to profit by the inactivity of the Black pieces defending the Pawn, in order to improve the position of White at other points.
White no longer has an offensive strategy, but he has forced Black into a significant weakness. Now White's entire plan will be to take advantage of this weakness (the weak King's Pawn), and the student can now see how the previously discussed principles are applied in this game. Every move is aimed at making the weak King's Pawn impossible to defend or to benefit from the inactivity of the Black pieces protecting the Pawn, in order to enhance White's position in other areas.
13. B × B | Q × B | |
14. O - O | R - B 3 | |
15. K R - K 1 | Kt - Q 3 | |
16. R - K 2 | B - Q 2 |
At last the Bishop comes out, not as an active attacking piece, but merely to make way for the Rook.
At last, the Bishop comes out, not as a piece on the offense, but just to clear the path for the Rook.
17. Q R - K 1 | R - K 1 | |
18. P - Q B 4 | Kt - B 2 |
A very clever move, tending to prevent P - B 5, and tempting White to play Kt × B, followed by B × P, which would be bad, as the following variation shows: 19 Kt × B, Q × Kt; 20 B × P, Kt - Kt 4; 21 Q - Kt 4, R × B; 22 P - K R 4, P - K R 4; 23 Q × R, P × Q; 24 R × R ch, K - R 2; 25 P × Kt, Q × P. But it always happens in such cases that, if one line of attack is anticipated, there is another; and this is no exception to the rule, as will be seen.
A very smart move, aimed at preventing P - B 5, and tempting White to play Kt × B, followed by B × P, which would be a mistake, as the following variation shows: 19 Kt × B, Q × Kt; 20 B × P, Kt - Kt 4; 21 Q - Kt 4, R × B; 22 P - K R 4, P - K R 4; 23 Q × R, P × Q; 24 R × R ch, K - R 2; 25 P × Kt, Q × P. But it often happens in such cases that if one line of attack is expected, there's another; and this is no exception to the rule, as will be shown.
19. P - Q 5 ! | Kt × Kt |
20. R × Kt | P - K Kt 3 | |
21. Q - R 4 | K - Kt 2 | |
22. Q - Q 4 | P - B 4 |
Forced, as White threatened P × K P, and also Q × P
Forced, as White threatened P x K P, and also Q x P
23. Q - B 3 | P - Kt 3 |
Q - Q 3 was better. But Black wants to tempt White to play P × P, thinking that he will soon after regain his Pawn with a safe position. Such, however, is not the case, as White quickly demonstrates. I must add that in any case Black's position is, in my opinion, untenable, since all his pieces are tied up for the defence of a Pawn, while White's pieces are free to act.
Q - Q 3 was better. But Black wants to lure White into playing P × P, thinking he will soon reclaim his Pawn while staying in a safe position. However, that’s not how it plays out, as White quickly shows. I should mention that regardless, Black's position is, in my view, hopeless since all of his pieces are tied up defending a Pawn, while White's pieces are free to move.
24. P × P | B - B 1 |
25. B - K 2 ! |
25. ........ | B × P | |
26. B - B 3 | K - B 2 | |
27. B - Q 5 | Q - Q 3 |
Now it is evident that all the Black pieces are tied up, and it only remains for White to find the quickest way to force the issue. White will now try to place his Queen at K R 6, and then advance the K R P to R 5 in order to break up the Black Pawns defending the King.
Now it's clear that all the Black pieces are stuck, and it’s just a matter of White finding the fastest way to finish the game. White will try to move the Queen to K R 6, and then push the K R P to R 5 to disrupt the Black Pawns protecting the King.
28. Q - K 3 | R - K 2 |
If 28...P - B 5; 29 Q - K R 3, P - K R 4; 30 Q - R 4, R - K 2; 31 Q - Kt 5, K - Kt 2; 32 P - K R 4, Q - Q 2; 33 P - K Kt 3, P × P; 34 P - B 4, and Black will soon be helpless, as he has to mark time with his pieces while White prepares to advance P - R 5, and finally at the proper time to play R × B, winning.
If 28...P - B 5; 29 Q - K R 3, P - K R 4; 30 Q - R 4, R - K 2; 31 Q - Kt 5, K - Kt 2; 32 P - K R 4, Q - Q 2; 33 P - K Kt 3, P × P; 34 P - B 4, and Black will soon be helpless, as he has to stall with his pieces while White gets ready to advance P - R 5, and eventually at the right moment to play R × B, winning.
29. Q - R 6 | K - Kt 1 | |
30. P - K R 4 | P - R 3 | |
31. P - R 5 | P - B 5 | |
32. P × P | P × P | |
33. R × B | Resigns. |
Commenting on White's play in this game, Dr. E. Lasker said at the time that if White's play were properly analysed it might be found that there was no way to improve upon it.
Commenting on White's play in this game, Dr. E. Lasker said at the time that if White's play were properly analyzed, it might be found that there was no way to improve it.
23. RELINQUISHING THE INITIATIVE
23. GIVING UP THE INITIATIVE
In the third case, there is nothing to do, once the material advantage is obtained, but to submit to the opponent's attack for a while, and once it has been repulsed to act quickly with all your forces and win on material. A good example of this type of game is given below.
In the third case, once you gain the material advantage, there's nothing to do but endure the opponent's attack for a while. Once it’s successfully defended against, act quickly with all your strength and secure the win based on material. A good example of this type of game is given below.
Example 53.—From the Havana International Masters Tournament, 1913. (Ruy Lopez.) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: D. Janowski.
Example 53.—From the Havana International Masters Tournament, 1913. (Ruy Lopez.) White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: D. Janowski.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - Q B 3 | |
3. B - Kt 5 | Kt - B 3 | |
4. O - O | P - Q 3 | |
5. B × Kt ch | P × B | |
6. P - Q 4 | B - K 2 | |
7. Kt - B 3 |
P × P might be better, but at the time I was not familiar with that variation, and therefore I played what I knew to be good.
P × P might be better, but at the time I wasn’t familiar with that variation, so I played what I knew was good.
7. ........ | Kt - Q 2 | |
8. P × P | P × P | |
9. Q - K 2 | O - O | |
10. R - Q 1 | B - Q3 | |
11. B - Kt 5 | Q - K 1 | |
12. Kt - K R 4 | P - Kt 3 |
Black offers the exchange in order to gain time and to obtain an attack. Without considering at all whether or not such a course was justified on the part of Black, it is evident that as far as White is concerned there is only one thing to do, viz., to win the exchange and then prepare to weather the storm. Then, once it is passed, to act quickly with all forces to derive the benefit of numerical superiority.
Black makes the exchange to buy some time and launch an attack. Regardless of whether Black’s decision was justified, it’s clear that White has only one option: to take the exchange and then get ready to withstand the coming challenges. Once the storm has passed, White should act quickly with all their pieces to take advantage of their numerical superiority.
13. B - R 6 | Kt - B 4 | |
14. R - Q 2 | R - Kt 1 | |
15. Kt - Q 1 | R - Kt 5 |
To force White to play P - Q B 4, and thus create a hole at Q 5 for his Knight.[7] Such grand tactics show the hand of a master.
To make White play P - QB 4, creating a gap at Q 5 for his Knight.[7] Such impressive tactics reveal the skill of a master.
16. P - Q B 4 | Kt - K 3 | |
17. B × R | Q × B | |
18. Kt - K 3 |
Kt - K B 3 was better.
Kt - K B 3 was better.
18. ........ | Kt - Q 5 | |
19. Q - Q 1 | P - Q B 4 |
In order to prevent R × Kt giving back the exchange, but winning a Pawn and relieving the position.
In order to stop R × Kt from returning the exchange while gaining a pawn and improving the position.
20. P - Q Kt 3 | R - Kt 1 |
In order to play B - Kt 2 without blocking his Rook.
In order to play B - Kt 2 without blocking his Rook.
Black's manœuvring for positional advantage is admirable throughout this game, and if he loses it is due entirely to the fact that the sacrifice of the exchange, without even a Pawn for it, could not succeed against sound defensive play.
Black's maneuvering for positional advantage is impressive throughout this game, and if he loses, it’s solely because the sacrifice of the exchange, without even a Pawn to show for it, couldn't succeed against solid defensive play.
21. Kt - B 3 | P - B 4 | |
22. P × P | P × P |
23. Kt - B 1 | P - B 5 | |
24. Kt × Kt | B P × Kt | |
25. Q - R 5 | B - Kt 2 | |
26. R - K 1 | P - B 4 |
He could not play R - K 1 because of R × Q P. Besides, he wants to be ready to play P - K 5. At present White cannot with safety play R × K P, but he will soon prepare the way for it. Then, by giving up a Rook for a Bishop and a Pawn, he will completely upset Black's attack and come out a Pawn ahead. It is on this basis that White's whole defensive manœuvre is founded.
He couldn't move the Rook to K1 because of R×QP. Also, he wants to be ready to move to P-K5. Right now, White can't safely play R×KP, but he'll soon set it up. Then, by sacrificing a Rook for a Bishop and a Pawn, he will totally disrupt Black's attack and end up a Pawn ahead. This is the foundation of White's entire defensive strategy.
27. P - B 3 | R - K 1 | |
28. R (Q 2) - K 2 | R - K 3 |
29. R × P | B × R | |
30. R × B | R - K R 3 | |
31. Q - K 8 | Q × Q | |
32. R × Q ch | K - B 2 | |
33. R - K 5 | R - Q B 3 | |
34. Kt - Q 2 |
R - B 5 ch might have been better. The text move did not prove as strong as anticipated.
R - B 5 ch might have been better. The text move didn't turn out to be as strong as expected.
34. ........ | K - B 3 | |
35. R - Q 5 | R - K 3 | |
36. Kt - K 4 ch | K - K 2 |
R × Kt would lose easily
R × Kt would lose easily
37. R × B P | P - Q 6 ! |
Very fine. White cannot play R B 7 ch because of K - Q 1; R × B, R × Kt winning.
Very good. White can't play R B 7 ch because of K - Q 1; R × B, R × Kt winning.
38. K - B 2 | B × Kt | |
39. P × B | R × P | |
40. R - Q 5 | R - K 6 |
The ending is very difficult to win. At this point White had to make the last move before the game was adjourned.
The ending is really hard to win. At this moment, White needed to make the final move before the game was paused.
41. P - Q Kt 4 ! | R - K 5 | |
42. R × P | R × P | |
43. R - K R 3 | R × P | |
44. R × P ch | K - B 3 | |
45. R × P | K - B 4 | |
46. K - B 3 | R - Kt 7 | |
47. R - R 5 ch | K - B 3 | |
48. R - R 4 | K - Kt 4 | |
49. R × P | R × R P | |
50. P - R 4 ch | K - R 4 | |
51. R - B 5 ch | K - R 3 | |
52. P - Kt 4 | Resigns |
I have passed over the game lightly because of its difficult nature, and because we are at present concerned more with the opening and the middle-game than we are with the endings, which will be treated separately.
I have skimmed over the game briefly because it’s challenging, and because right now we’re focusing more on the opening and the middle game instead of the endings, which will be covered separately.
24. CUTTING OFF PIECES FROM THE SCENE OF ACTION
24. REMOVING PARTS FROM THE SCENE OF ACTION
Very often in a game a master only plays to cut off, so to speak, one of the pieces from the scene of actual conflict. Often a Bishop or a Knight is completely put out of action. In such cases we might say that from that moment the game is won, because for all practical purposes there will be one more piece on one side than on the other. A very good illustration is furnished by the following game. {95}
Very often in a game, a master will play to remove one of the pieces from the actual conflict. Often, a Bishop or a Knight is completely sidelined. In these situations, we could say that from that moment, the game is won, because practically speaking, one side will have one more piece than the other. A great example of this is shown in the following game. {95}
Example 54.—Played at the Hastings Victory Tournament, 1919. (Four Knights.) White: W. Winter. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
Example 54.—Played at the Hastings Victory Tournament, 1919. (Four Knights.) White: W. Winter. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - Q B 3 | |
3. Kt - B 3 | Kt - B 3 | |
4. B - Kt 5 | B - Kt 5 | |
5. O - O | O - O | |
6. B × Kt |
Niemzowitch's variation, which I have played successfully in many a game. It gives White a very solid game. Niemzowitch's idea is that White will in due time be able to play P - K B 4, opening a line for his Rooks, which, in combination with the posting of a Knight at K B 5, should be sufficient to win. He thinks that should Black attempt to stop the Knight from going to K B 5, he will have to weaken his game in some other way. Whether this is true or not remains to be proved, but in my opinion the move is perfectly good. On the other hand, there is no question that Black can easily develop his pieces. But it must be considered that in this variation White does not attempt to hinder Black's development, he simply attempts to build up a position which he considers impregnable and from which he can start an attack in due course.
Niemzowitch's variation, which I have successfully played in many games, provides White with a very solid position. Niemzowitch's idea is that White will eventually be able to play P-KB4, opening a line for his rooks, which, combined with placing a knight on KB5, should be enough to secure a win. He believes that if Black tries to prevent the knight from reaching KB5, it will come at the cost of weakening his position in another way. Whether that’s true or not still needs to be proven, but in my view, this move is entirely sound. On the flip side, there’s no doubt that Black can easily develop his pieces. However, it should be noted that in this variation, White doesn't try to block Black's development; instead, he aims to strengthen a position that he believes is unassailable and from which he can launch an attack when the time is right.
6. ........ | Q P × B |
The alternative, Kt P × B; gives White the best of the game, without doubt.[8]
The alternative, Kt P × B, gives White the upper hand in the game, no question about it.[8]
7. P - Q 3 | B - Q 3 | |
8. B - Kt 5 |
This move is not at all in accordance with the nature of this variation. The general strategical plan for White is to play P - K R 3, to be followed in time by the advance of the K Kt P to Kt 4, and the bringing of the Q Kt to K B 5 via K 2 and K Kt 3 or Q 1 and K 3. Then, if possible, the K Kt is linked with the other Kt by placing it at either K R 4, K Kt 3, or K 3 as the occasion demands. The White King sometimes remains at Kt 1, and other times it is placed at K Kt 2, but mostly at K R 1. Finally, in most cases comes P - K B 4, and then the real attack begins. Sometimes it is a direct assault against the King,[9] and at other times it comes simply to finessing for positional advantage in the end-game, after most of the pieces have been exchanged.[10]
This move doesn’t align at all with the nature of this variation. The overall strategy for White is to move the pawn to R3, followed eventually by advancing the knight pawn to K4 and bringing the knight to B5 via K2 and K3 or Q1 and K3. Then, if possible, the knight connects with the other knight by moving to R4, K3, or K3 as needed. The White King sometimes stays on K1, other times it goes to K2, but mostly it’s at R1. Finally, in most cases, the pawn moves to B4, and that’s when the real attack starts. Sometimes it’s a direct assault on the King, and at other times it’s about finessing for a positional advantage in the endgame after most pieces have been exchanged.
8. ........ | P - K R 3 | |
9. B - R 4 | P - B 4 |
To prevent P - Q 4 and to draw White into playing Kt - Q 5, which would prove fatal. Black's plan is to play P - K Kt 4, as soon as the circumstances permit, in order to free his Queen and Knight from the pin by the Bishop.
To stop P - Q 4 and to lure White into playing Kt - Q 5, which would be disastrous. Black's strategy is to move P - K Kt 4 as soon as the situation allows, to free his Queen and Knight from the Bishop's pin.
10. Kt - Q 5 |
White falls into the trap. Only lack of experience can account for this move. White should have considered that a player of my experience and strength could never allow such a move if it were good.
White falls into the trap. Only a lack of experience can explain this move. White should have realized that a player with my experience and skill could never allow such a move if it were worthwhile.
10. ........ | P - K Kt 4 |
After this move White's game is lost. White cannot play Kt × Kt P, because Kt × Kt will win a piece. Therefore he must play B - Kt 3, either before or after Kt × Kt, with disastrous results in either case, as will be seen.
After this move, White's game is over. White can't play Knight captures Knight on Pawn, because Knight captures Knight will lose a piece. So, he has to play Bishop to Knight 3, either before or after Knight captures Knight, with terrible outcomes in either scenario, as will be shown.
11. Kt × Kt ch | Q × Kt | |
12. B - Kt 3 | B - Kt 5 | |
13. P - K R 3 | B × Kt | |
14. Q × B | Q × Q | |
15. P × Q | P - K B 3 |
A simple examination will show that White is minus a Bishop for all practical purposes. He can only free it by sacrificing one Pawn, and possibly not even then. At least it would lose time besides the Pawn. Black now devotes all his energy to the Queen's side, and, having practically a Bishop more, the result cannot be in doubt. The rest of the game is given, so that the student may see how simple it is to win such a game. {99}
A quick look will show that White is down a Bishop for all practical purposes. He can only free it by sacrificing one Pawn, and even then, it might not be possible. At best, it would waste time in addition to losing the Pawn. Black is now focusing all his efforts on the Queen's side, and with practically an extra Bishop, the outcome is clear. The rest of the game is provided, so that the student can see how straightforward it is to win such a game. {99}
16. K - Kt 2 | P - Q R 4 | |
17. P - Q R 4 | K - B 2 | |
18. R - R 1 | K - K 3 | |
19. P - R 4 | K R - Q Kt 1 |
There is no necessity to pay any attention to the King's side, because White gains nothing by exchanging Pawns and opening the King's Rook file.
There’s no need to focus on the King’s side since White doesn’t benefit from exchanging Pawns and opening the King’s Rook file.
20. P × P | R P × P | |
21. P - Kt 3 | P - B 3 | |
22. R - Q R 2 | P - Kt 4 | |
23. K R - R 1 | P - B 5 |
If White takes the proffered Pawn, Black regains it immediately by R - Kt 5, after P × B P.
If White takes the offered pawn, Black quickly gets it back by R-Kt5, after P×BP.
24. R P × P | P × P (Kt 6) | |
25. B P × P | R × P | |
26. R - R 4 | R × P | |
27. P - Q 4 | R - Kt 4 | |
28. R - B 4 | R - Kt 5 | |
29. R × B P | R × P | |
Resigns |
25. A PLAYER'S MOTIVES CRITICISED IN A SPECIMEN GAME
25. A PLAYER'S MOTIVES CRITICIZED IN A SPECIMEN GAME
Now that a few of my games with my own notes have been given, I offer for close perusal and study a very fine game played by Sir George Thomas, one of England's foremost players, against Mr. F. F. L. Alexander, in the championship of the City of London Chess Club in the winter of 1919-1920. It has the {100}interesting feature for the student that Sir George Thomas kindly wrote the notes to the game for me at my request, and with the understanding that I would make the comments on them that I considered appropriate. Sir George Thomas' notes are in brackets and thus will be distinguished from my own comments.
Now that I’ve shared a few of my games with my own notes, I present for careful reading and analysis a remarkable game played by Sir George Thomas, one of England's top players, against Mr. F. F. L. Alexander, in the championship of the City of London Chess Club during the winter of 1919-1920. It has the {100}interesting aspect for students that Sir George Thomas kindly wrote the notes for the game at my request, with the understanding that I would make the comments I felt were appropriate. Sir George Thomas' notes are in brackets, so they can be easily distinguished from my own comments.
Example 55.—Queen's Gambit Declined. (The notes within brackets by Sir George Thomas.) White: Mr. F. F. L. Alexander. Black: Sir George Thomas.
Example 55.—Queen's Gambit Declined. (The notes within brackets by Sir George Thomas.) White: Mr. F. F. L. Alexander. Black: Sir George Thomas.
1. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
3. P - B 4 | P - K 3 | |
4. Kt - B 3 | Q Kt - Q 2 | |
5. B - Kt 5 | P - B 3 | |
6. P - K 3 | Q - R 4 |
(One of the objects of Black's method of defence is to attack White's Q Kt doubly by Kt - K 5, followed by P × P. But 7 Kt - Q 2 is probably a strong way {101}of meeting this threat.) There are, besides, two good reasons for this method of defence; first, that it is not as much played as some of the other defences and consequently not so well known, and second that it leaves Black with two Bishops against B and Kt, which, in a general way, constitutes an advantage.
(One of the goals of Black's defense strategy is to put pressure on White's knight on the king's side by moving the knight to king's five, followed by taking the pawn. But moving the knight to queen's two is probably a strong way {101} to counter this threat.) Additionally, there are two solid reasons for this defense method: first, it’s not used as frequently as some other defenses, so it’s less familiar to opponents, and second, it allows Black to have two bishops against a bishop and knight, which generally provides an advantage.
7. B × Kt | Kt × B | |
8. P - Q R 3 | Kt - K 5 | |
9. Q - Kt 3 | B - K 2 |
This is not the logical place for the B which should have been posted at Q 3. In the opening, time is of great importance, and therefore the player should be extremely careful in his development and make sure that he posts his pieces in the right places.
This isn’t the right spot for the B, which should have been played at Q 3. In the opening, timing is crucial, so the player needs to be very careful about their development and ensure they position their pieces correctly.
10. B - Q 3 | Kt × Kt | |
11. P × Kt | P × P | |
12. B × B P | B - B 3 |
(I did not want White's Kt to come to K 5, from where I could not dislodge it by P - K B 3 without weakening my K P.) The same result could be accomplished by playing B - Q 3. Incidentally it bears out my previous statement that the B should have been originally played to Q 3.
(I did not want White's knight to move to King 5, where I couldn't get rid of it by pawn to King Bishop 3 without weakening my King pawn.) The same result could be achieved by playing Bishop to Queen 3. This also supports my earlier point that the Bishop should have originally been played to Queen 3.
13. O - O |
The alternative was P - K 4, followed by P - K 5, and then O - O. White would thereby assume the initiative but would weaken his Pawn position considerably, and might be compelled to stake all on a {102}violent attack against the King. This is a turning point in the game, and it is in such positions that the temperament and style of the player decide the course of the game.
The alternative was P - K 4, followed by P - K 5, and then O - O. White would take the lead but would significantly weaken his Pawn position, possibly forcing him to go all out in a violent attack against the King. This is a turning point in the game, and it’s in these situations that a player's temperament and style will influence the outcome of the game.
13. ........ | O - O | |
14. P - K 4 | P - K 4 |
15. P - Q 5 |
(White might play 15 K R - Q 1, keeping the option of breaking up the centre later on. I wanted him to advance this P as there is now a fine post for my B at Q B 4.) By this move White shows that he does not understand the true value of his position. His only advantage consisted in the undeveloped condition of Black's Q B. He should therefore have made a plan to prevent the B from coming out, or if that were not possible, then he should try to force Black to weaken his Pawn position in order to come out with the B. There were three moves to consider: first, {103}P - Q R 4, in order to maintain the White B in the dominating position that it now occupies. This would have been met by Q - B 2; second, either of the Rooks to Q 1 in order to threaten 16 P × P, B × P; 17 Kt × B, Q × Kt; 18 B × P ch. This would have been met by B - Kt 5; and third, P - K R 3 to prevent B - Kt 5 and by playing either R to Q 1, followed up as previously stated to force Black to play P - Q Kt 4, which would weaken his Queen's side Pawns. Thus by playing P - K R 3 White would have attained the desired object. The text move blocks the action of the White B and facilitates Black's development. Hereafter White will act on the defensive, and the interest throughout the rest of the game will centre mainly on Black's play and the manner in which he carries out the attack.
(White might play 15 K R - Q 1, keeping the option of breaking up the center later on. I wanted him to advance this P as there is now a great spot for my B at Q B 4.) With this move, White demonstrates that he doesn’t grasp the real value of his position. His only advantage was the undeveloped state of Black's Q B. Therefore, he should have devised a plan to prevent the B from coming out, or if that wasn't possible, he should have aimed to force Black to weaken his Pawn structure in order to bring out the B. There were three moves to consider: first, {103}P - Q R 4, to keep the White B in the strong position it currently holds. This would have been countered by Q - B 2; second, moving either of the Rooks to Q 1 to threaten 16 P × P, B × P; 17 Kt × B, Q × Kt; 18 B × P ch. This would have been met by B - Kt 5; and third, P - K R 3 to block B - Kt 5 and by moving either R to Q 1, followed up as previously stated to force Black to play P - Q Kt 4, which would weaken his Queen's side Pawns. Thus, by playing P - K R 3, White would have achieved the desired objective. The current move blocks the action of the White B and makes it easier for Black to develop. From here on, White will be on the defensive, and the focus for the rest of the game will mainly be on Black's moves and how he carries out the attack.
15. ........ | Q - B 2 | |
16. B - Q 3 |
(This seems wrong, as it makes the development of Black's Queen wing easier. At present he cannot play P - Q Kt 3, because of the reply P × P followed by B - Q 5.)
(This seems wrong, as it makes it easier for Black to develop his Queen's wing. Right now, he can't play P - Q Kt 3 because of the response P × P followed by B - Q 5.)
16. ........ | P - Q Kt 3 | |
17. P - B 4 | B - Kt 2 | |
18. K R - B 1 |
(With the idea of Q R - Kt 1 and P - B 5. But it only compels Black to bring his B to Q B 4, which he would do in any case.)
(With the idea of Q R - Kt 1 and P - B 5. But it only forces Black to bring his B to Q B 4, which he would do anyway.)
18. ........ | B - K 2 | |
19. R - B 2 | B - B 4 | |
20. Q - Kt 2 | P - B 3 |
(It would have been better, probably, to play 20...K R - K 1, with the idea of P - B 4 presently.) Black's play hereabout is weak; it lacks force, and there seems to be no well-defined plan of attack. It is true that these are the most difficult positions to handle in a game. In such cases a player must conceive a plan on a large scale, which promises chances of success, and with it all, it must be a plan that can be carried out with the means at his disposal. From the look of the position it seems that Black's best chance would be to mass his forces for an attack against White's centre, to be followed by a direct attack against the King. He should, therefore, play Q R - K 1, threatening P - K B 4. If White is able to defeat this plan, or rather to prevent it, then, once he has fixed some of the White pieces on the King's side, he should quickly shift his attack to the Queen's side, and open a line for his Rooks, which, once they enter in action, should produce an advantage on account of the great power of the two Bishops.
(It would have probably been better to play 20...K R - K 1, with the idea of P - B 4 soon.) Black's play around here is weak; it lacks strength, and there doesn't seem to be a clear plan of attack. It's true that these are the toughest positions to handle in a game. In such situations, a player must come up with a big-picture plan that promises chances of success, and it has to be a plan that can be executed with the resources available. Based on the position, it seems that Black's best chance would be to gather his forces for an attack on White's center, followed by a direct attack on the King. Therefore, he should play Q R - K 1, threatening P - K B 4. If White can thwart this plan or prevent it, then, once he has fixed some of White's pieces on the King's side, he should quickly shift his attack to the Queen's side and open a line for his Rooks, which, once they get into action, should create an advantage due to the great power of the two Bishops.
21. Q R - Kt 1 | Q R - Q 1 | |
22. P - Q R 4 | B - R 3 | |
23. R - Q 1 |
(White has clearly lost time with his Rook's moves.)
(White has clearly wasted time with his Rook's moves.)
23. ........ | K R - K 1 | |
24. Q - Kt 3 |
(To bring his Queen across after Kt - R 4 and B - K 2.)
(To move his Queen after Kt - R 4 and B - K 2.)
24. ........ | R - Q 3 | |
25. Kt - R 4 | P - Kt 3 | |
26. B - K 2 |
26. ........ | P × P |
(I thought this exchange necessary here, as White is threatening to play his Bishop via Kt 4 to K 6. If he retook with the Bishop's Pawn I intended to exchange Bishops and rely on the two Pawns to one on the Queen's wing. I did not expect him to retake it with the King's Pawn, which seemed to expose him to a violent King's side attack.) Black's judgment in this instance I believe to be faulty. Had White retaken with the B P, as he expected, he would have had the worst of the Pawn position, as White would have had a passed Pawn well supported on the Queen's side. His only advantage would lie in his having a very well posted Bishop against a badly {106}posted Knight, and on the fact that in such positions as the above, the Bishop is invariably stronger than the Knight. He could and should have prevented all that, by playing B - B 1, as, had White then replied with Q - Kt 3, he could then play P × P, and White would not have been able to retake with the B P on account of B × P ch winning the exchange.
(I thought this exchange was necessary here, as White is threatening to move his Bishop to K 6 via Kt 4. If he had taken back with the Bishop's Pawn, I planned to exchange Bishops and use the two Pawns against his one on the Queen's side. I didn't expect him to recapture with the King's Pawn, which seemed to leave him open to a strong attack on the King's side.) Black's judgment in this instance seems to be flawed. If White had recaptured with the B P, as he anticipated, he would have ended up with a disadvantageous Pawn position, as White would have had a well-supported passed Pawn on the Queen's side. His only advantage would have been having a well-placed Bishop versus a poorly placed Knight, and the fact that in such positions, the Bishop is generally stronger than the Knight. He could and should have avoided all of this by playing B - B 1, because if White had replied with Q - Kt 3, he could then play P x P, and White wouldn’t have been able to recapture with the B P due to B x P ch winning the exchange.
27. K P × P | P - K 5 | |
28. P - Kt 3 | P - K 6 |
I do not like this move. It would have been better to hold it in reserve and to have played P - B 4, to be followed in due time by P - K Kt 4 and P - B 5, after having placed the Q at Q 2, K B 2, or some other square as the occasion demanded. The text move blocks the action of the powerful B at Q B 4, and tends to make White's position safer than it should have been. The move in itself is a very strong attacking move, but it is isolated, and there is no effective continuation. Such advances as a rule should only be made when they can be followed by a concerted action of the pieces.
I don’t like this move. It would have been better to keep it in reserve and play P-B4, which could be followed later by P-KKt4 and P-B5, after positioning the Q at Q2, KB2, or another square as needed. The current move blocks the strong B at QB4 and makes White's position safer than it should be. While the move itself is a powerful attacking move, it's isolated, and there’s no effective next step. Generally, such advances should only be made when they can be supported by a coordinated action of the pieces.
29. P - B 4 | B - B 1 | |
30. Kt - B 3 | B - B 4 | |
31. R - Kt 2 | R - K 5 | |
32. K - Kt 2 | Q - B 1 | |
33. Kt - Kt 1 | P - K Kt 4 |
(If now 34 B - B 3, P × P; 35 B × R, B × B ch, with a winning attack.)
(If now 34 B - B 3, P × P; 35 B × R, B × B ch, with a winning attack.)
34. P × P | P × P | |
35. R - K B 1 | P - Kt 5 |
R - R 3 was the alternative. White's only move would have been K - R 1. The position now is evidently won for Black, and it is only a question of finding the right course. The final attack is now carried on by Sir George Thomas in an irreproachable manner.
R - R 3 was the alternative. White's only move would have been K - R 1. The position now is clearly won for Black, and it's just a matter of figuring out the right way to proceed. The final attack is now executed by Sir George Thomas flawlessly.
36. B - Q 3 | R - K B 3 | |
37. Kt - K 2 | Q - B 1 |
(Again preventing B × R, by the masked attack on White's Rook. White therefore protects his Rook.) If Kt - B 4, P - K 7 !; 39 Kt × P, R × Kt ch; 40 R × R, B - K 5 ch !!; 41 B × B, best, R × R and White is lost. If, however, against 38 Kt - B 4, Black plays Q - R 3, and White 39 Q - B 2, I take pleasure {108}in offering the position to my readers as a most beautiful and extraordinary win for Black, beginning with 39...Q - R 6 ch !!! I leave the variations for the student to work out.
(Again preventing B × R, by the masked attack on White's Rook. White therefore protects his Rook.) If Kt - B 4, P - K 7 !; 39 Kt × P, R × Kt ch; 40 R × R, B - K 5 ch !!; 41 B × B, best, R × R and White is lost. If, however, against 38 Kt - B 4, Black plays Q - R 3, and White 39 Q - B 2, I take pleasure {108}in offering the position to my readers as a stunning and remarkable win for Black, starting with 39...Q - R 6 ch !!! I leave the variations for the student to work out.
38. R (Kt 2) - Kt 1 | Q - R 3 | |
39. Q - B 2 |
(Making a double attack on the Rook—which still cannot be taken—and preparing to defend the K R P.) If either the Rook or Bishop are taken White would be mated in a few moves.
(Making a double attack on the Rook—which still can't be taken—and getting ready to defend the K R P.) If either the Rook or Bishop is taken, White would be checkmated in a few moves.
39. ........ | Q - R 6 ch | |
40. K - R 1 | R × P !! |
(If 40...R - R 3; 41 Kt - Kt 1, Q × Kt P; 42 Q - K Kt 2. Black therefore tries to get the Queen away from the defence.) A very beautiful move, and the best way to carry on the attack.
(If 40...R - R 3; 41 Kt - Kt 1, Q × Kt P; 42 Q - K Kt 2. Black therefore tries to get the Queen away from the defense.) A very elegant move and the best way to keep the attack going.
41. Q × R |
(The best defence was 41 R × B, but Black would emerge with Queen against Rook and Knight.)
(The best defense was 41 R × B, but Black would come out ahead with a Queen against a Rook and Knight.)
41. ........ | B × B |
(Again, not R - K R 3; because of P - Q 6 dis. ch.)
(Again, not R - K R 3; because of P - Q 6 dis. ch.)
42. R × R |
(If 42 Q × B, then, at last, R - R 3 wins.)
(If 42 Q × B, then, finally, R - R 3 wins.)
42. ........ | B × Q | |
43. Kt - B 4 | P - K 7 ! |
(The Queen has no escape, but White has no time to take it.)
(The Queen has no way out, but White doesn't have the time to capture it.)
44. R - K Kt 1 | Q - B 8 |
White resigns. A very fine finish.
White resigns. A really nice finish.
CHAPTER V
End-Game Strategy
Final Strategy
We must now revert once more to the endings. Their importance will have become evident to the student who has taken the trouble to study my game with Janowski (Example 53). After an uneventful opening—a Ruy Lopez—in one of its normal variations, my opponent suddenly made things interesting by offering the exchange; an offer which, of course, I accepted. Then followed a very hard, arduous struggle, in which I had to defend myself against a very dangerous attack made possible by the excellent manœuvring of my adversary. Finally, there came the time when I could give back the material and change off most of the pieces, and come to an ending in which I clearly had the advantage. But yet the ending itself was not as simple as it at first appeared, and finally—perhaps through one weak move on my part—it became a very difficult matter to find a win. Had I been a weak end-game player the game would probably have ended in a draw, and all my previous efforts would have been in vain. Unfortunately, that is very often the case among the large majority of players; they are weak in the endings; a failing from which masters of the first rank are at times not free. {111}Incidentally, I might call attention to the fact that all the world's champions of the last sixty years have been exceedingly strong in the endings: Morphy, Steinitz, and Dr. Lasker had no superiors in this department of the game while they held their titles.
We need to go back to endings again. Their importance should be clear to anyone who has taken the time to analyze my game with Janowski (Example 53). After a pretty standard opening—a Ruy Lopez—in one of its typical variations, my opponent made things exciting by offering to exchange pieces; I, of course, accepted. This led to a tough, challenging battle, where I had to defend against a dangerous attack set up by my opponent's excellent maneuvers. Eventually, there came a moment when I could give back some material and trade off most of the pieces, reaching an endgame where I clearly had the upper hand. However, the endgame itself wasn't as straightforward as it first seemed, and ultimately—perhaps due to one weak move on my part—it became quite difficult to secure a win. If I had been a weak endgame player, the game likely would have ended in a draw, rendering all my previous efforts pointless. Unfortunately, this is often the case for most players; they struggle in the endgames, a weakness that even top masters sometimes have. {111}Furthermore, I’d like to point out that all the world champions of the last sixty years have been incredibly strong in the endgames: Morphy, Steinitz, and Dr. Lasker had no equals in this area of the game while they held their titles.
26. THE SUDDEN ATTACK FROM A DIFFERENT SIDE
26. THE SUDDEN ATTACK FROM ANOTHER SIDE
I have previously stated, when speaking about general theory, that at times the way to win consists in attacking first on one side, then, granted greater mobility of the pieces, to transfer the attack quickly from one side to the other, breaking through before your opponent has been able to bring up sufficient forces to withstand the attack. This principle of the middle-game can sometimes be applied in the endings in somewhat similar manner.
I have mentioned before, when talking about general theory, that sometimes the best way to win is to attack first on one side and then, if your pieces are more mobile, quickly shift the attack to the other side. This can catch your opponent off guard before they can bring in enough pieces to defend. This middle-game strategy can sometimes be applied in the endgame in a similar way.
Example 56.
Example 56.
In the above position I, with the Black pieces, played:
In the position above, I, playing as Black, moved:
1. ........ | R - K 5 ch | |
2. R - K 2 | R - Q R 5 | |
3. R - R 2 | P - K R 4 |
The idea, as will be seen very soon, is to play P - R 5 in order to fix White's King's side Pawns with a view to the future. It is evident to Black that White wants to bring his King to Q Kt 3 to support his two weak isolated Pawns, and thus to free his Rooks. Black, therefore, makes a plan to shift the attack to the King's side at the proper time, in order to obtain some advantage from the greater mobility of his Rooks.
The plan, as will soon become clear, is to play P - R 5 to pin down White's King-side Pawns for future strategy. It's obvious to Black that White intends to move his King to Q Kt 3 to back up his two weak isolated Pawns and free his Rooks. Therefore, Black devises a strategy to shift the attack to the King’s side at the right moment to gain some advantage from the increased mobility of his Rooks.
4. R - Q 1 | R (Q 4) - Q R 4 |
in order to force the Rook to Rook's square, keeping both Rooks tied up.
in order to position the Rook on Rook's square, keeping both Rooks occupied.
5. R (Q 1) - R 1 | P - R 5 | |
6. K - Q 2 | K - Kt 2 | |
7. K - B 2 | R - K Kt 4 |
Black begins to transfer his attack to the King's side.
Black starts shifting his attack to the King's side.
8. R - K Kt 1 |
A serious mistake, which loses quickly. White should have played 8 K - Kt 3, when Black would have answered 8...R (R 5) - R 4; 9 P - B 3, and Black would have obtained an opening at K Kt 6 for his King, which in the end might give him the victory.
A serious mistake that leads to a quick loss. White should have played 8 K - Kt 3, when Black would have responded with 8...R (R 5) - R 4; 9 P - B 3, and Black would have gained an opening at K Kt 6 for his King, which could ultimately lead to victory.
8. ........ | R - K B 5 |
Now the King cannot go to Kt 3, because of R - Kt 4 ch.
Now the King can't move to Kt 3, because of R - Kt 4 ch.
9. K - Q 3 | R - B 6 ch | |
10. K - K 2 |
If P × R, R × R; followed by R - K R 8 winning,
If P × R, R × R; followed by R - K R 8 winning,
10. ........ | R × R P |
and Black won after a few moves.
and Black won after a few moves.
Example 57.—Another good example, in which is shown the advantage of the greater mobility of the pieces in an ending, is the following from a game Capablanca-Kupchick played at the Havana Masters Tournament, 1913. The full score and notes of the game can be found in the book of the tournament.
Example 57.—Another great example that demonstrates the advantage of having more mobile pieces in an ending is from a game between Capablanca and Kupchick at the Havana Masters Tournament in 1913. You can find the complete score and notes of the game in the tournament book.
White's only advantage in the above position is that he possesses the open file and has the move, which will secure him the initiative. There is also the slight advantage of having his Pawns on the Queen's side united, while Black has an isolated Q R P. The {114}proper course, as in the previous ending, is to bring the Rooks forward, so that at least one of them may be able to shift from one side of the board to the other, and thus keep Black's Rooks from moving freely. What this means in general theory has been stated already; it really means: keep harassing the enemy; force him to use his big pieces to defend Pawns. If he has a weak point, try to make it weaker, or create another weakness somewhere else and his position will collapse sooner or later. If he has a weakness, and he can get rid of it, make sure that you create another weakness somewhere else.
White's only advantage in this position is that he has the open file and it’s his turn to move, which gives him the initiative. He also has a slight edge with his Pawns on the Queen's side connected, while Black has an isolated Queen's Rook Pawn. The {114}right strategy, like in the earlier ending, is to bring the Rooks up so that at least one can move from one side of the board to the other, preventing Black's Rooks from moving freely. In general theory, this means: keep pressuring the opponent; force them to use their major pieces to defend Pawns. If they have a weak spot, try to make it worse, or create another weakness elsewhere, and their position will eventually fall apart. If they have a weak point they can eliminate, ensure you create another weakness somewhere else.
From the position in question the game continued thus:
From that position, the game went on like this:
1. R - K 4 | K R - K 1 |
with the object of repeating White's manœuvre, and also not to allow White the control of the open file.
with the goal of repeating White's move, and also to prevent White from taking control of the open file.
2. Q R - K 1 | R - K 3 | |
3. Q R - K 3 | R (B 1) - K 1 | |
4. K - B 1 | K - B 1 |
Black wants to bring his King to the centre of the board in order to be nearer to whatever point White decides to attack. The move is justified at least on the general rule that in such endings the King should be in the middle of the board. He does nothing after all but follow White's footsteps. Besides, it is hard to point out anything better. If 4...P - Q 4; 5 R - Kt 4 ch, followed by K - K 2, would leave Black in {115}a very disagreeable position. If 4...P - K B 4; 5 R - Q 4! R × R? 6 P × R, R × P; 7 K - B 2, R - K 2; 8 R - Q R 4, winning the Q R P, which would practically leave White with a passed Pawn ahead on the Queen's side, as the three Pawns of Black on the King's side would be held by the two of White.
Black wants to move his King to the center of the board to get closer to wherever White decides to attack. This move makes sense, at least according to the general rule that in these endgames, the King should be in the middle. After all, he’s just following White's lead. Plus, it’s hard to find a better option. If 4...P - Q 4; 5 R - Kt 4 ch, followed by K - K 2, Black would end up in a very tough spot. If 4...P - K B 4; 5 R - Q 4! R × R? 6 P × R, R × P; 7 K - B 2, R - K 2; 8 R - Q R 4, it would result in White winning the Q R P, effectively leaving White with a passed Pawn on the Queen's side, while Black's three Pawns on the King's side would be blocked by White's two.
5. K - K 2 | K - K 2 | |
6. R - Q R 4 | R - Q R 1 |
The student should note that through the same manœuvre Black is forced into a position similar to the one shown in the previous ending.
The student should note that through the same maneuver, Black is forced into a position similar to the one shown in the previous ending.
7. R - R 5! |
This move has a manifold object. It practically fixes all of Black's Pawns except the Q P, which is the only one that can advance two squares. It specially prevents the advance of Black's K B Pawns, and at the same time threatens the advance of White's K B Pawns to B 4 and B 5. By this threat it practically forces Black to play P - Q 4, which is all White desires, for reasons that will soon become evident.
This move has multiple purposes. It effectively locks all of Black's pawns in place except for the queen's pawn, which is the only one that can move forward two squares. It specifically stops Black's king's bishop pawns from advancing while threatening to push White's king's bishop pawns to b4 and b5. This threat essentially forces Black to play pawn to queen 4, which is exactly what White wants, for reasons that will soon be clear.
7. ........ | P - Q 4 | |
8. P - Q B 4! | K - Q 3 |
Evidently forced, as the only other move to save a Pawn would have been P × P, which would have left all Black's Pawns isolated and weak. If 8...P - Q 5; 9 R - K 4, K - Q 3; 10 P - Q Kt 4! R - K 4; 11 R - R 6, and Black's game is hopeless.
Evidently forced, since the only other move to save a pawn would have been pawn takes pawn, which would have left all of Black's pawns isolated and weak. If 8...pawn to queen 5; 9 rook to king 4, king to queen 3; 10 pawn to queen knight 4! rook to king 4; 11 rook to rook 6, then Black's position is hopeless.
9. P - B 5 ch | K - Q 2 | |
10. P - Q 4 | P - B 4 |
Apparently very strong, since it forces the exchange of Rooks because of the threat R - R 3; but in reality it leads to nothing. The best chance was to play R - K K 1.
Apparently very strong, since it forces the exchange of rooks due to the threat of R-R3; but in reality, it leads to nothing. The best move was to play R-KK1.
11. R × R | P × R | |
12. P - B 4 |
Up to now White had played with finesse, but this last move is weak. R - R 6 was the proper way to continue, so as to force Black to give up his Q R P or Q B P.
Up to now, White had played skillfully, but this last move is weak. R-R 6 was the right way to continue, so as to force Black to give up his Q R P or Q B P.
12. ........ | K - B 1 | |
13. K - Q 2 |
Again a bad move. 13 R - R 3 was the proper continuation, and if then 13...R - Kt 1; 14 P - Kt 3, K - Kt 2; 15 P - Kt 4, K - R 1; 16 R - Q Kt 3, with excellent winning chances; in fact, I believe, a won game.
Again, a bad move. 13 R - R3 was the right continuation, and if then 13...R - Kt1; 14 P - Kt3, K - Kt2; 15 P - Kt4, K - R1; 16 R - QKt3, with great winning chances; in fact, I believe it was a won game.
13. ........ | K - Kt 2 |
14. R - R 3 | R - K Kt 1 | |
15. R - R 3 | R - Kt 2 | |
16. K - K 2 | K - R 3 | |
17. R - R 6 | R - K 2 | |
18. K - Q 3 | K - Kt 2 |
He goes back with the King to support his K P, and thus be able to utilise his Rook. It is, however, useless, and only White's weak play later on gives him further chances of a draw.
He goes back with the King to support his K P, allowing him to use his Rook. However, it's ineffective, and only White's poor play later on gives him more chances for a draw.
19. P - K R 4 | K - B 1 | |
20. R - R 5 |
To prevent the Black Rook from controlling the open file
To stop the Black Rook from taking over the open file
20. ........ | K - Q 2 | |
21. R - Kt 5 | R - B 2 | |
22. K - B 3 | K - B 1 |
He must keep his King on that side because White threatens to march with his King to R 6 via Kt 4.
He needs to keep his King on that side because White is threatening to move his King to R6 via K4.
23. K - Kt 4 | R - B 3 | |
24. K - R 5 | K - Kt 2 | |
25. P - R 4 | P - Q R 3 | |
26. P - R 5 | R - R 3 |
He can do nothing but wait for White. The text move stops White from moving his Rook, but only for one move.
He can only wait for White. The text move prevents White from moving his Rook, but just for one turn.
27. P - Kt 4 | R - B 3 |
28. P - Kt 5 |
A weak move, which gives Black a fighting chance. In this ending, as is often the case with most players, White plays the best moves whenever the situation is difficult and requires careful handling, but once his position seems to be overwhelming he relaxes his efforts and the result is nothing to be proud of. The right move was 28 R - Kt 7.
A weak move that gives Black a shot at winning. In this endgame, as is often the case with most players, White makes the best moves when things get tough and need careful management, but as soon as their position looks commanding, they ease up and the outcome isn’t impressive. The correct move was 28 R - Kt 7.
28. ........ | R P × P | |
29. P × P | R - B 1 ! | |
30. R - Kt 7 | R - R 1 ch | |
31. K - Kt 4 | P × P | |
32. K × P | R - R 7 | |
33. P - B 6 ch | K - Kt 1 | |
34. R × R P | R - Kt 7 ch | |
35. K - R 5 | R - R 7 ch | |
36. K - Kt 4 | R × P |
Black misses his last chance: R - Kt 7 ch, forcing the King to B 3, in order to avoid the perpetual, {119}would probably draw. The reader must bear in mind that my opponent was then a very young and inexperienced player, and consequently deserves a great deal of credit for the fight he put up.
Black misses his last chance: R - Kt 7 ch, forcing the King to B 3, to avoid the perpetual, {119}would probably result in a draw. It's important to remember that my opponent was a very young and inexperienced player at the time, and therefore deserves a lot of credit for the effort he put up.
37. R - K 7 | R × P |
R - Kt 7 ch; followed by R - K R 7, offered better chances.
R - Kt 7 ch; followed by R - K R 7, provided better opportunities.
38. P - R 6! | R × P ch | |
39. K - Kt 5 | R - Q 8 | |
40. P - R 7 | R - Kt 8 ch | |
41. K - B 5 | R - B 8 ch | |
42. K - Q 4 | R - Q 8 ch | |
43. K - K 5 | R - K 8 ch | |
44. K - B 6 | R - K R 8 | |
45. R - K 8 ch | K - R 2 | |
46. P - R 8 (Q) | R × Q | |
47. R × R | K - Kt 3 | |
48. K × P | K × P | |
49. K × P | K - B 4 | |
50. K - K 5 | Resigns. |
This ending shows how easy it is to make weak moves, and how often, even in master-play, mistakes are made and opportunities are lost. It shows that, so long as there is no great advantage of material, even with a good position, a player, no matter how strong, cannot afford to relax his attention even for one move. {120}
This ending reveals how simple it is to make poor moves and how frequently, even in expert play, mistakes are made and chances are missed. It shows that as long as there's no significant material advantage, even with a strong position, a player, regardless of their strength, cannot afford to let their guard down, even for a single move. {120}
27. THE DANGER OF A SAFE POSITION
27. THE DANGER OF A SAFE POSITION
Example 58.—A good proof of the previous statement is shown in the following ending between Marshall and Kupchick in one of their two games in the same Tournament (Havana, 1913).
Example 58.—A good example of the previous statement can be seen in the following conclusion from one of the two games played between Marshall and Kupchick in the same tournament (Havana, 1913).
It is evident that Marshall (White) is under great difficulties in the above position. Not only is he bound to lose a Pawn, but his position is rather poor. The best he could hope for was a draw unless something altogether unexpected happened, as it did. No reason can be given for Black's loss of the game except that he felt so certain of having the best of it with a Pawn more and what he considered a safe position, that he became exceedingly careless and did not consider the danger that actually existed. Let us see how it happened.
It’s clear that Marshall (White) is in a tough spot. He’s not only going to lose a Pawn, but his position isn’t great either. The most he could realistically aim for was a draw unless something completely surprising happened, which it did. There's no explanation for Black's loss except that he was so confident about having the upper hand with an extra Pawn and what he thought was a secure position that he got overly casual and didn’t recognize the real danger he was in. Let’s see how it went down.
1. P - Kt 4 | R × R P |
The mistakes begin. This is the first. Black sees that he can take a Pawn without any danger, and does not stop to think whether there is anything better. R - B 7 ch was the right move. If then K - Kt 3, R × P. If instead White played K - K 4, then R - K 4 ch followed by R × R P.
The mistakes start now. This is the first one. Black notices he can take a pawn without any risk and doesn’t pause to consider if there’s a better move. R-B7+ was the right play. If then K-Kt3, R×P. If instead White played K-K4, then R-K4+ followed by R×RP.
2. R - Q 1 | R - R 5 ch |
Mistake number two, and this time such a serious one as to almost lose the game. The proper move was to play P - B 4 in order to break up White's Pawns and at the same time make room for the Black King, which is actually in danger, as will soon be seen.
Mistake number two, and this time it was serious enough to almost lose the game. The right move was to play P - B 4 to break up White's Pawns and also create space for the Black King, which is actually in danger, as will soon become clear.
3. R - Q 4 | R (R5) - R 4 |
Mistake number three and this time fatal. His best move was R (Kt 4) - R 4. After the text move there is no defence. Black's game is lost. This shows that even an apparently simple ending has to be played with care. From a practically won position Black finds himself with a lost game, and it has only taken three moves.
Mistake number three, and this time it's fatal. His best move was R (Kt 4) - R 4. After this move, there's no defense. Black's position is lost. This illustrates that even a seemingly simple ending needs to be played with caution. From what looked like a practically won position, Black now finds himself in a losing game, and it’s only taken three moves.
4. R (Q 4) - Q 8 | R - Kt 2 |
If 4...P - B 4; 5 R - R 8 ch, K - Kt 3; 6 R (B 8) - Kt 8 ch, K - B 3; 7 R × P ch, R - Kt 3; 8 P - Kt 5 ch, K - K 2; 9 R (R 6) × R, P × R; 10 R - Kt 7 ch, K - K 1; 11 R × Kt P, and wins easily.
If 4...P - B 4; 5 R - R 8 check, K - Kt 3; 6 R (B 8) - Kt 8 check, K - B 3; 7 R takes P check, R - Kt 3; 8 P - Kt 5 check, K - K 2; 9 R (R 6) takes R, P takes R; 10 R - Kt 7 check, K - K 1; 11 R takes Kt P, and wins easily.
5. P - R 4 | P - R 4 | |
6. R - R 8 ch | Resigns. |
28. ENDINGS WITH ONE ROOK AND PAWNS
28. ENDINGS WITH ONE ROOK AND PAWNS
The reader has probably realised by this time that endings of two Rooks and Pawns are very difficult, and that the same holds true for endings of one Rook and Pawns. Endings of two Rooks and Pawns are not very common in actual play; but endings of one Rook and Pawns are about the most common sort of endings arising on the chess board. Yet though they do occur so often, few have mastered them thoroughly. They are often of a very difficult nature, and sometimes while apparently very simple they are in reality extremely intricate. Here is an example from a game between Marshall and Rosenthal in the Manhattan Chess Club Championship Tournament of 1909-1910.
The reader has probably realized by now that endgames with two rooks and pawns are very challenging, and the same goes for endgames with one rook and pawns. Endgames with two rooks and pawns aren't very common in actual play, but endgames with one rook and pawns are among the most frequently occurring types of endgames on the chessboard. Yet, even though they happen so often, few people have truly mastered them. They can be quite complex, and sometimes they seem very straightforward but are actually incredibly intricate. Here’s an example from a game between Marshall and Rosenthal in the Manhattan Chess Club Championship Tournament of 1909-1910.
Example 59.
Example 59.
In this position Marshall had a simple win by R - B 7 ch, but played P - B 6, and thereby gave Black a chance to draw. Luckily for him Black did not see the drawing move, played poorly, and lost. Had Black been up to the situation he would have drawn by playing R - Q 3.
In this situation, Marshall had an easy win with R-B7 check, but instead played P-B6, which gave Black a chance to tie. Fortunately for him, Black missed the chance to draw, played badly, and lost. If Black had been aware of the situation, he could have forced a draw by playing R-Q3.
1. P - B 6 | R - Q 3 ! |
Now White has two continuations, either (a) P - B 7, or (b) R - B 7 ch. We have therefore:
Now White has two moves to choose from, either (a) P - B 7, or (b) R - B 7 ch. So we have:
(a) | 2. P - B 7 | R - Q 1 ! |
3. R - R 5 ch | K - B 5 |
and White will finally have to sacrifice the Rook for Black's Pawn. Or—
and White will finally have to give up the Rook for Black's Pawn. Or—
(b) | 2. R - B 7 ch | K - Q 5 ! |
3. P - B 7 | R - Kt 3 ch ! |
a very important move, as against R - K B 3, R - K 7 wins.
a very important move, because against R - K B 3, R - K 7 wins.
4. K - B 1 | R - K B 3 | |
5. R - Kt 7 | K - B 6 |
and White will finally have to sacrifice the Rook for the Pawn, or draw by perpetual check.
and White will ultimately need to sacrifice the Rook for the Pawn, or settle for a draw with perpetual check.
Now there would be two other moves to try: either (a) R - Kt 3 ch, or (b) R - K B 3. Let us examine them.
Now there would be two other moves to consider: either (a) R - Kt 3 ch, or (b) R - K B 3. Let’s take a look at them.
(a) | 1. ........ | R - Kt 3 ch |
2. K - B 3 | R - B 3 ch | |
3. K - K 3 | R - K 3 ch |
If P - Kt 6; R - R 5 ch wins, because if the King goes back, then R - R 6, and if the King goes up, then R - R 4 ch, followed by R - K B 4 wins.
If P - Kt 6; R - R 5 check wins, because if the King goes back, then R - R 6, and if the King goes up, then R - R 4 check, followed by R - K B 4 wins.
4. K - Q 3 | R - K B 3 |
If R - Q 3 ch; K - K 4 wins.
If R - Q3 ch; K - K4 wins.
5. R - R 5 ch | K moves | |
6. R - R 6 wins |
(b) | 1. ........ | R - B 3 |
2. R - Kt 7 ! | K - B 5 |
3. P - R 4 | P - Kt 6 | |
4. R - Kt 4 ch | K moves | |
5. R - Kt 3 |
and White will either capture the Pawn or play R - K B 3, according to the circumstances, and come out with a winning ending.
and White will either capture the Pawn or play R-KB3, depending on the situation, and end up with a winning position.
Now, going back to the position shown on page 122, suppose that after 1 P - B 6, R - Q 3; 2 R - B 7 ch, Black did not realise that K - Q 5 was the only move to draw, and consequently played K - Kt 3 instead, we would then have the following position:
Now, looking back at the position on page 122, let's say that after 1 P - B 6, R - Q 3; 2 R - B 7 ch, if Black didn't notice that K - Q 5 was the only move to draw, and instead played K - Kt 3, we would then have the following position:
Now the best continuation would be:
Now the best next step would be:
1. P - B 7 | R - Kt 3 ch (best) | |
2. K - B 1 | R - K B 3 | |
3. R - K 7 ! | K - B 4 (best) |
White threatened to check with the Rook at K 6.
White threatened to check with the Rook at K6.
4. K - K 2 | P - Kt 6 |
Best. If K - B 5; both P - R 4 and K - K 3 will win; the last-named move particularly would win with ease.
Best. If K - B 5; both P - R 4 and K - K 3 will win; the last-named move especially would win easily.
5. R - K 3 | P - Kt 7 (best) | |
6. R - Q Kt 3 | R × P | |
7. R × P | R - K R 2 | |
8. R - Q 2 | R × P | |
9. K - K 3 |
This position we have arrived at is won by White, because there are two files between the opposing King and the Pawn from which the King is cut off by the Rook, and besides, the Pawn can advance to the fourth rank before the opponent's Rook can begin to check on the file. This last condition is very important, because if, instead of the position on the diagram, the Black Rook were at K R 1, and Black had the move, he could draw by preventing the {127}advance of the Pawn, either through constant checks or by playing R - K B 1 at the proper time.
This position we've reached is a win for White because there are two files between the opposing King and the Pawn, and the Rook is blocking the King from moving. Plus, the Pawn can move up to the fourth rank before the opponent's Rook can start checking from that file. This last point is crucial because if, instead of the position shown in the diagram, the Black Rook were on K R 1 and Black had the move, he could force a draw by stopping the Pawn from advancing, either by delivering constant checks or by moving R - K B 1 at the right moment.
Now that we have explained the reasons why this position is won, we leave it to the student to work out the correct solution.
Now that we’ve explained why this position is winning, we’ll let the student figure out the correct solution.
The fact that out of one apparently simple ending we have been able to work out several most unusual and difficult endings should be sufficient to impress upon the student's mind the necessity of becoming well acquainted with all kinds of endings, and especially with endings of Rook and Pawns.
The fact that from one seemingly simple ending we've managed to develop several very unusual and challenging endings should be enough to emphasize to the student the importance of being familiar with all types of endings, especially those involving Rooks and Pawns.
29. A DIFFICULT ENDING: TWO ROOKS AND PAWNS
29. A CHALLENGING FINALE: TWO ROOKS AND PAWNS
Following our idea that the best way to learn endings as well as openings is to study the games of the masters, we give two more endings of two Rooks and Pawns. These endings, as already stated, are not very common, and the author is fortunate in having himself played more of these endings than is generally the case. By carefully comparing and studying the endings already given (Examples 56 and 57) with the following, the student no doubt can obtain an idea of the proper method to be followed in such cases. The way of procedure is somewhat similar in all of them.
Following our belief that the best way to learn endings and openings is to study the games of the masters, we present two more endings involving two Rooks and Pawns. These types of endings, as mentioned earlier, are not very common, and the author is lucky to have played more of them than usual. By carefully comparing and studying the endings already presented (Examples 56 and 57) with the ones that follow, the student can certainly get a sense of the proper method to use in these situations. The approach is somewhat similar in all of them.
It is Black's move, and no doubt thinking that drawing such a position (that was all Black played for) would be easy, he contented himself with a waiting policy. Such conduct must always be criticised. It often leads to disaster. The best way to defend such positions is to assume the initiative and keep the opponent on the defensive.
It’s Black’s turn, and probably thinking that getting a draw from this position (which is all Black aimed for) would be easy, he decided to take a wait-and-see approach. This kind of behavior should always be criticized. It often results in failure. The best way to defend in such situations is to take control and keep the opponent on the back foot.
1. ........ | Q R - K 1 |
The first move is already wrong. There is nothing to gain by this move. Black should play P - Q R 4; to be followed by P - Q R 5; unless White plays P - Q Kt 3. That would fix the Queen's side. After that he could decide what demonstration he could make with his Rooks to keep the opponent's Rooks at bay.
The first move is already a mistake. There’s nothing to gain from it. Black should play P - QR4; followed by P - QR5; unless White plays P - QKt3. That would secure the Queen's side. After that, he could figure out how to use his Rooks to keep the opponent’s Rooks at a distance.
2. R - Q 4 |
2. ........ | R - B 3 |
probably with the idea of a demonstration on the King's side by R - Kt 3 and Kt 7.
probably with the idea of a demonstration on the King's side by R - Kt 3 and Kt 7.
3. P - Kt 3 | P × P ch | |
4. P × P | K - B 2 | |
5. K - Q 3 |
R - Q R 1 should have been played now, in order to force Black to defend with R - K 2. White, however, does not want to disclose his plan at once, and thus awaken Black to the danger of his position, hence this move, which seems to aim at the disruption of Black's Queen's side Pawns.
R - Q R 1 should have been played now, to make Black defend with R - K 2. However, White doesn’t want to reveal his plan right away and alert Black to the danger of his position, so he makes this move, which appears to target the disruption of Black's Queen's side Pawns.
5. ........ | R - K 2 | |
6. R - Q R 1 | K - K 3 |
This is a mistake. Black is unaware of the danger of his position. He should have played P - Kt 4; threatening R - R 3, and, by making this demonstration against White's K R P, stop the attack against his Queen's side Pawns, which will now develop.
This is a mistake. Black doesn't realize how risky his position is. He should have played P-Kt4, threatening R-R3, and by doing this, putting pressure on White's KRP, he could have prevented the attack on his Queen's side Pawns, which will now start to develop.
7. R - R 6 | R - Q B 2 |
He could not play K - Q 3, because P - Q B 4 would win at least a Pawn. This in itself condemns his last move K - K 3, which has done nothing but make his situation practically hopeless.
He couldn't play K - Q 3, because P - QB 4 would win at least a pawn. This alone condemns his last move K - K 3, which has done nothing but make his situation basically hopeless.
8. R (Q 4) - Q R 4 | P - K Kt 4 |
Now forced, but it is a little too late. He could not play 8...K R - B 2, because P - K B 4 would have {130}left his game completely paralysed. Black now finally awakens to the danger, and tries to save the day by the counter-demonstration on the King's side, which he should have started before. Of course, White cannot play R × R P, because of R × R, followed by R - R 3, recovering the Pawn with advantage.
Now forced, but it’s a bit too late. He couldn’t move 8...K R - B 2 because P - K B 4 would have {130}left his game completely stuck. Black finally realizes the danger and tries to turn things around with a counter-attack on the King's side, which he should have started earlier. Of course, White can’t play R × R P because of R × R, followed by R - R 3, recovering the Pawn with an advantage.
9. P - K R 4 ! | P - Kt 5 |
Black is now in a very disagreeable position. If he played 9...P × P; 10 R × P would leave him in a very awkward situation, as he could not go back with the King, nor could he do much with either Rook. He practically would have to play 10...P - K R 3, when White would answer 11 P - Kt 4, threatening to win a Pawn by P - Kt 5, or, if that were not enough, he might play K - Q 4, to be followed finally by the entry of the King at B 5 or K 5.
Black is now in a really tough spot. If he plays 9...P × P; 10 R × P would leave him in a very tricky situation because he couldn’t move the King back, and he wouldn’t have much to do with either Rook. He would basically have to play 10...P - K R 3, and then White would respond with 11 P - Kt 4, threatening to win a Pawn with P - Kt 5, or if that wasn't enough, he might move K - Q 4, which would eventually be followed by the King moving to B 5 or K 5.
10. K - K 2 |
10. ........ | P × P ch |
Again he cannot play P - K R 4, because P - K B 4 would leave him paralysed. The advance of his K R P would make White's K R P safe, and consequently his K R would have to retire to K B 2 to defend the Q R P. That would make it impossible for his King to go to Q 2, because of the Q R P, nor could he advance a single one of his Pawns. On the other hand, White would play P - Kt 4, threatening to win a Pawn by P - Kt 5, or he might first play K - Q 4, and then at the proper time P - Kt 5, if there was nothing better. Black meanwhile could really do nothing but mark time with one of his Rooks. Compare this bottling-up system with the ending in Example 57, and it will be seen that it is very similar.
Once again, he can't play P-KR4, because P-KB4 would leave him stuck. Moving his KR pawn would make White's KR pawn secure, so his KR would have to go back to KB2 to defend the QR pawn. That would prevent his King from moving to Q2 because of the QR pawn, and he wouldn't be able to push any of his Pawns forward. Meanwhile, White would play P-Kt4, threatening to capture a Pawn with P-Kt5, or he might first play K-Q4 and then, at the right moment, P-Kt5 if there wasn't a better move. Black, in the meantime, could really only stall with one of his Rooks. If you compare this situation with the ending in Example 57, you'll see it’s very similar.
11. K × P | R (B 3) - B 2 | |
12. K - K 2 |
Probably wrong. P - Kt 4 at once was the right move. The text move gives Black good chances of drawing.
Probably wrong. P - Kt 4 right away was the correct move. The text move gives Black a good chance to draw.
12. ........ | K - Q 3 | |
13. P - Kt 4 | R - Q Kt 2 |
This could never have happened had White played 12 P - Kt 4, as he could have followed it up by P - Kt 5 after Black's K - Q 3.
This would never have happened if White had played 12 P - Kt 4, as he could have followed up with P - Kt 5 after Black's K - Q 3.
14. P - R 5 |
Not good. P - K B 4 offered the best chances of {132}winning by force. If then 14...R - Kt 2; 15 P - R 5, R - Kt 7 ch; 16 K - Q 3, R - K R 7; 17 R × P, R × R; 18 R × R, R × P; 19 R - R 6, with winning chances.
Not good. P-KB4 offered the best chances of winning by force. If then 14...R-Kt2; 15 P-R5, R-Kt7 ch; 16 K-Q3, R-KR7; 17 R×P, R×R; 18 R×R, R×P; 19 R-R6, with winning chances.
14. ........ | P - R 3 |
Black misses his last chance. P - B 5 would draw. If then 15 P × P, R (Kt 2) - K 2 ch !; 16 K - B 1, R × P; 17 R × P, R - K 6 !
Black misses his last chance. P - B 5 would draw. If then 15 P × P, R (Kt 2) - K 2 ch !; 16 K - B 1, R × P; 17 R × P, R - K 6 !
15. P - K B 4 | R - Kt 2 | |
16. K - Q 3 | R (K Kt 2) - K 2 | |
17. R - R 1 | R - Kt 2 | |
18. K - Q 4 | R - Kt 7 | |
19. R (R 6) - R 2 | R (Kt 2) - Kt 2 |
R (Kt 7) - Kt 2 would have offered greater resistance, but the position is lost in any case. (I leave the student to work this out.)
R (Kt 7) - Kt 2 would have put up more resistance, but the position is lost regardless. (I leave the student to figure this out.)
20. K - Q 3 ! | R × R | |
21. R × R | R - K 2 |
Nothing would avail. If 21...R - Kt 8; 22 R - R 6 ! R - Q 8 ch; 23 K - B 2, R - K R 8; 24 P - Kt 5, R × P; 25 R × P ch, K - Q 2; 26 R - Q R 6, and White will win easily.
Nothing would help. If 21...R - Kt 8; 22 R - R 6! R - Q 8 check; 23 K - B 2, R - K R 8; 24 P - Kt 5, R takes P; 25 R takes P check, K - Q 2; 26 R - Q R 6, and White will win easily.
22. R - K Kt 2 | R - K 3 | |
23. R - Kt 7 | R - K 2 | |
24. R - Kt 8 | P - B 4 |
Black is desperate. He sees he can no longer defend his Pawns.
Black is in a tough spot. He realizes he can’t protect his Pawns anymore.
25. R - Kt 6 ch | R - K 3 | |
26. P × P ch | K - Q 2 | |
27. R - Kt 7 ch | K - B 3 | |
28. R × P | K × P | |
29. R - K B 7 | Resigns. |
Example 61.—From the game Capablanca-Janowski, New York National Tournament of 1913.
Example 61.—From the game Capablanca-Janowski, New York National Tournament of 1913.
Black's game has the disadvantage of his double Q B P, which, to make matters worse, he cannot {134}advance, because as soon as Black plays P - Q Kt 3, White replies P - Q Kt 4. It is on this fact that White builds his plans. He will stop Black's Queen's side Pawns from advancing, and will then bring his own King to K 3. Then in due time he will play P - Q 4, and finally P - K 5, or P - K Kt 5, thus forcing an exchange of Pawns and obtaining in that way a clear passed Pawn on the King's file. It will be seen that this plan was carried out during the course of the game, and that White obtained his winning advantage in that way. The play was based throughout on the chance of obtaining a passed Pawn on the King's file, with which White expected to win.
Black's game has the disadvantage of his double Queen's Bishop Pawn, which is made worse by the fact that he can't advance it. As soon as Black plays Pawn to Queen's Knight 3, White responds with Pawn to Queen's Knight 4. This is the foundation of White's strategy. He will stop Black's Queen's side Pawns from moving forward and will then bring his own King to King 3. Eventually, he will play Pawn to Queen 4 and then Pawn to King 5, or Pawn to King’s Knight 5, forcing an exchange of Pawns and thereby creating a clear passed Pawn on the King's file. It will be evident that this plan was executed during the game, allowing White to gain his winning advantage. The entire strategy relied on the opportunity to create a passed Pawn on the King's file, which White expected would lead to victory.
1. P - K Kt 4 |
already preparing to play P - K Kt 5 when the time comes.
already preparing to play P-KKt5 when the time comes.
1. ........ | P - Q Kt 3 |
Black wants to play P - Q B 4, but White, of course, prevents it.
Black wants to play pawn to queen's bishop 4, but White, of course, stops it.
2. P - Kt 4 ! | K - Kt 2 |
This King should come to the King's side, where the danger lurks.
This King should come to the King’s side, where the danger is.
3. K - B 2 | P - Q Kt 4 |
4. P - Q R 4 ! | R - Q 5 |
Of course if P × P; Black will have all his Pawns on the Queen's side disrupted and isolated, and White can easily regain the lost Pawn by playing either Rook on the Q R file.
Of course, if P × P, Black will have all his pawns on the queenside disrupted and isolated, and White can easily recover the lost pawn by moving either rook to the QR file.
5. R - Q Kt 1 | R - K 4 |
He still wants to play P - Q B 4, but as it is easy to foresee that White will again prevent it, the text move is really a serious loss of time. Black should bring his King over to the other side immediately.
He still wants to play P - Q B 4, but since it's easy to predict that White will stop it again, this move is actually a significant waste of time. Black should move his King over to the other side right away.
6. K - K 3 | R - Q 2 | |
7. P - R 5 |
The first part of White's strategic plan is now accomplished. Black's Pawns on the Queen's side are fixed for all practical purposes.
The first part of White's strategic plan is now complete. Black's Pawns on the Queen's side are fixed for all practical purposes.
7. ........ | R - K 3 |
If R × R; Kt P × R would have given White a very powerful centre. Yet it might have been the best chance for Black.
If R × R; Kt P × R would have given White a really strong center. Still, it might have been Black's best chance.
8. R (Kt) - K B 1 | R (Q 2) - K 2 | |
9. P - Kt 5 | P × P | |
10. R × P |
The second part of White's strategical plan is now accomplished. It remains to find out if the advantage obtained is sufficient to win. White not only has a passed Pawn, but his King is in a commanding position in the centre of the board ready to support the advance of White's Pawns, or, if necessary, to go to Q B 5, or to move to the right wing in case of danger. Besides, White holds the open file with one of his Rooks. Altogether White's position is superior and his chances of winning are excellent.
The second part of White's strategic plan is now complete. It remains to see if the advantage gained is enough to win. White not only has a passed Pawn, but his King is in a strong position in the center of the board, ready to support the advance of White's Pawns or, if needed, to move to Q B 5 or shift to the right wing if there is danger. Additionally, White controls the open file with one of his Rooks. Overall, White's position is better, and his chances of winning are very good.
10. ........ | R - R 3 | |
11. R - Kt 3 | R (R 3) - K 3 |
to prevent P - Q 4. Also Black fears to keep his Rook in front of his two King's side Pawns which he may want to utilise later.
to prevent P - Q 4. Also, Black is hesitant to keep his Rook in front of his two King's side Pawns that he might want to use later.
12. P - R 4 | P - Kt 3 | |
13. R - Kt 5 | P - R 3 |
White threatens P - R 5, which would finally force Black to take, and then White would double his Rooks against the isolated Pawn and win it, or tie up Black's Rooks completely. The text move, however, only helps White; therefore Black had nothing better than to hold tight and wait. R - K 4 would not help much, as White would simply answer R - B 8, R - K 1; R (Kt 5) × R, and whichever Rook Black took, White would have an easy game. (The student should carefully study these variations.)
White threatens P-R5, which would finally force Black to capture, and then White would line up his Rooks against the isolated Pawn and win it, or completely immobilize Black's Rooks. However, the current move only benefits White; therefore, Black had no choice but to hold on and wait. R-K4 wouldn't do much, as White would simply respond with R-B8, R-K1; R(Kt5) × R, and whichever Rook Black captured, White would have an easy win. (The student should carefully study these variations.)
14. R - Kt 4 | R - Kt 2 | |
15. P - Q 4 | K - B 1 | |
16. R - B 8 ch | K - Kt 2 |
K - Q 2 would not help much, but since he made the previous move he should now be consistent and play it.
K - Q 2 wouldn't be very helpful, but since he made the last move, he should stick with it and play it.
The winning tactics in all these endings have merely consisted in keeping the opponent's Rooks tied to the defence of one or more Pawns, leaving my own Rooks free for action. This is a general principle which can be equally applied to any part of the game. It means in general terms—
The winning strategies in all these endgames have simply involved keeping my opponent's Rooks focused on defending one or more Pawns, which allows my own Rooks to move freely. This is a general principle that can be applied to any part of the game. In broader terms—
Keep freedom of manœuvre while hampering your opponent.
Maintain your ability to move freely while restricting your opponent.
There is one more thing of great importance, and that is that the winning side has always had a general strategical plan capable of being carried out with the means at his disposal, while often the losing side had no plan at all, but simply moved according to the needs of the moment.
There’s one more important thing to note: the winning side has always had a strategic plan that could be executed with the resources available, while the losing side often had no plan and just reacted to the immediate situation.
30. ROOK, BISHOP AND PAWNS v. ROOK, KNIGHT AND PAWNS
30. ROOK, BISHOP AND PAWNS v. ROOK, KNIGHT AND PAWNS
We shall now examine an ending of Rook, Bishop and Pawns against Rook, Knight and Pawns, where it will be seen that the Rook at times is used in the same way as in the endings already given.
We will now look at an endgame involving Rook, Bishop, and Pawns against Rook, Knight, and Pawns, where we will notice that the Rook is sometimes utilized in the same way as in the previous endgames mentioned.
In this position it is Black's move. To a beginner the position may look like a draw, but the advanced player will realise immediately that there are great possibilities for Black to win, not only because he has the initiative, but because of White's undeveloped Queen's side and the fact that a Bishop in such a position is better than a Knight (see Section 14). It will take some time for White to bring his Rook and Knight into the fray, and Black can utilise it to obtain an advantage. There are two courses open to him. The most evident, and the one that most players would take, is to advance the Pawn to Q B 4 and Q B 5 immediately in conjunction with the Bishop check at R 3 and any other move that might be necessary with the Black Rook. The other, and more subtle, course was taken by Black. It consists in utilising his Rook in the same way as shown in the previous endings, forcing White to defend something all the time, restricting the action of White's Knight and {140}White's Rook, while at the same time keeping freedom of action for his own Rook and Bishop.
In this position, it’s Black's turn to move. To a beginner, the position might seem like a draw, but an experienced player will quickly recognize that Black has great chances to win, not only because they have the initiative, but also due to White's undeveloped queenside and the fact that a Bishop is generally stronger than a Knight in this position (see Section 14). It will take time for White to get their Rook and Knight into play, giving Black the opportunity to gain an advantage. There are two options available. The most obvious choice, which most players would likely opt for, is to move the Pawn to Q B 4 and then Q B 5 right away along with the Bishop check at R 3 and any other necessary move with the Black Rook. The other, more subtle option was pursued by Black. This involves using the Rook similarly to how it was shown in the previous endings, forcing White to constantly defend something, limiting the mobility of White's Knight and Rook, while still allowing the Black Rook and Bishop to maneuver freely.
1. ........ | R - Kt 1 |
This forces P - Q Kt 3, which blocks that square for the White Knight.
This forces P - Q Kt 3, which blocks that square for the White Knight.
2. P - Kt 3 | R - Kt 4 |
bringing the Rook to attack the King's side Pawns so as to force the King to that side to defend them, and thus indirectly making more secure the position of Black's Queen's side Pawns.
bringing the Rook to attack the King's side Pawns to force the King to that side to defend them, thereby indirectly securing the position of Black's Queen's side Pawns.
3. P - B 4 | R - K R 4 | |
4. K - Kt 1 | P - B 4 |
Note that the White Knight's sphere of action is very limited, and that after Kt - Q 2 White's own Pawns are in his way.
Note that the White Knight's area of influence is very restricted, and that after Kt - Q 2, White's own Pawns are blocking his path.
5. Kt - Q 2 | K - B 2 | |
6. R - B 1 ch |
This check accomplishes nothing. It merely drives Black's King where it wants to go. Consequently it is a very bad move. P - Q R 3 at once was the best move.
This check does nothing. It just pushes Black's King exactly where it wants to go. So, it’s a really bad move. P - Q R 3 right away was the best move.
6. ........ | K - K 2 | |
7. P - Q R 3 | R - R 3 |
Getting ready to shift the attack to the Queen's side, where he has the advantage in material and position.
Getting ready to move the attack to the Queen's side, where he has the upper hand in both material and position.
8. P - K R 4 | R - R 3 |
Notice how similar are the manœuvres with this Rook to those seen in the previous endings.
Notice how similar the maneuvers with this Rook are to those seen in the previous endings.
9. R - R 1 | B - Kt 5 |
Paralysing the action of the Knight and fixing the whole King's side.
Paralyzing the Knight's movement and locking down the entire King's side.
10. K - B 2 | K - K 3 |
White cannot answer Kt - B 3, because B × Kt followed by K - K 4 will win a Pawn, on account of the check at K B 3 which cannot be stopped.
White can't respond to Kt - B 3, because B × Kt followed by K - K 4 will win a Pawn, due to the check at K B 3 that can't be blocked.
11. P - R 4 | K - K 4 | |
12. K - Kt 2 | R - K B 3 | |
13. R - K 1 | P - Q 6 | |
14. R - K B 1 | K - Q 5 |
Now the King attacks White's Pawns and all will soon be over.
Now the King is attacking White's Pawns, and it will all be over soon.
15. R × R | P × R | |
16. K - B 2 | P - B 3 |
Merely to exhaust White's move, which will finally force him to move either the King or the Knight.
Simply to wear out White's move, which will ultimately make him move either the King or the Knight.
The quickest way to win. White should resign.
The fastest way to win. White should give up.
28. Kt - Q 6 | P - B 4 | |
29. P - Kt 4 | P × P | |
30. P - B 5 | P - Kt 6 | |
31. Kt - B 4 | K - Kt 6 | |
32. Kt - K 3 | P - Kt 7 | |
Resigns. |
A very good example on Black's part of how to conduct such an ending.
A great example from Black on how to handle that kind of ending.
CHAPTER VI
Further Openings and Middle-Games
More Openings and Middlegames
31. SOME SALIENT POINTS ABOUT PAWNS
31. Important Facts About Pawns
Before going back to the discussion of openings and middle-game positions, it might be well to bear in mind a few facts concerning Pawn positions which will no doubt help to understand certain moves, and sometimes even the object of certain variations in the openings, and of some manœuvres in the middle-games.
Before returning to the discussion of openings and middle-game positions, it’s helpful to keep in mind a few facts about Pawn positions that will definitely aid in understanding certain moves, and sometimes even the purpose of various strategies in the openings, as well as some maneuvers in the middle games.
Example 63.—In the position of the diagram we have an exceedingly bad Pawn formation on Black's side. Black's Q B P is altogether backward, and White could by means of the open file concentrate {144}his forces against that weak point. There is also the square at White's Q B 5, which is controlled by White, and from where a White piece once established could not be dislodged. In order to get rid of it, Black would have to exchange it, which is not always an easy matter, and often when possible not at all convenient. The same holds true with regard to Black's K P, K B P and K Kt P, which create what is called a "hole" at Black's K B 3. Such Pawn formations invariably lead to disaster, and consequently must be avoided.
Example 63.—In the current position of the diagram, Black has a really poor Pawn structure. Black's Queen’s Bishop Pawn is completely behind, and White could use the open file to focus their forces on that weak spot. There's also the square at White's Queen’s Bishop 5, which White controls, and once a White piece is placed there, it can't be removed easily. To get rid of it, Black would need to trade it, which isn't always simple and often inconvenient. The same applies to Black's King Pawn, King’s Bishop Pawn, and King’s Knight Pawn, which create what is known as a "hole" at Black's King’s Bishop 3. These kinds of Pawn structures typically lead to trouble, so they should definitely be avoided.
Example 64.—In this position we might say that the White centre Pawns have the attacking position, while the Black centre Pawns have the defensive position. Such a formation of Pawn occurs in the French Defence. In such positions White most often attempts, by means of P - K B 4 and K B 5, to obtain a crushing attack against Black's King, which is generally Castled on the King's side. To prevent that, {145}and also to assume the initiative or obtain material advantage, Black makes a counter-demonstration by P - Q B 4, followed by P × P (when White defends the Pawn by P - Q B 3), and the concentrating of Black's pieces against the White Pawn at Q 4. This in substance might be said to be a determined attack against White's centre in order to paralyse the direct attack of White against Black's King. It must be remembered that at the beginning of the book it was stated that control of the centre was an essential condition to a successful attack against the King.
Example 64.—In this position, we can say that the White center pawns have the attacking position, while the Black center pawns are in a defensive position. This type of pawn structure occurs in the French Defense. In these positions, White typically tries to launch a strong attack against Black's King, which is usually castled on the King’s side, by playing P - K B 4 and K B 5. To prevent this and to take the initiative or gain a material advantage, Black counters with P - Q B 4, followed by P × P (when White defends the pawn with P - Q B 3), and focuses Black's pieces against the White pawn at Q 4. Essentially, this can be viewed as a determined attack against White’s center to paralyze White’s direct assault on Black’s King. It’s important to recall that at the beginning of the book, it was mentioned that control of the center is essential for a successful attack against the King.
In an abstract way we may say that two or more Pawns are strongest when they are in the same rank next to one another. Thus the centre Pawns are strongest in themselves, so to speak, when placed at K 4 and Q 4 respectively, hence the question of advancing either the one or the other to the fifth rank is one that must be most carefully considered. The advance of either Pawn often determines the course the game will follow.
In a general sense, we can say that two or more Pawns are most powerful when they're on the same rank next to each other. So, the center Pawns are at their strongest when positioned at K 4 and Q 4, respectively. Therefore, the decision to advance either one to the fifth rank needs to be thought through very carefully. Moving either Pawn often decides the direction the game will take.
Another thing to be considered is the matter of one or more passed Pawns when they are isolated either singly or in pairs. We might say that a passed Pawn is either very weak or very strong, and that its weakness or strength, whichever happens to be in the case to be considered, increases as it advances, and is at the same time in direct relation to the number of pieces on the board. In this last respect it might be generally said that a passed Pawn increases in strength as the number of pieces on the board diminishes. {146}
Another thing to think about is the issue of one or more passed Pawns when they are isolated, whether alone or in pairs. We can say that a passed Pawn is either very weak or very strong, and its weakness or strength, depending on the situation, grows as it moves forward, and is directly related to the number of pieces left on the board. In this regard, it can generally be said that a passed Pawn becomes stronger as the number of pieces on the board decreases. {146}
Having all this clear in mind we will now revert to the openings and middle-game. We will analyse games carefully from beginning to end according to general principles. I shall, whenever possible, use my own games, not because they will better illustrate the point, but because, knowing them thoroughly, I shall be able to explain them more authoritatively than the games of others.
With all this in mind, we will now return to the openings and middle game. We will carefully analyze games from start to finish based on general principles. Whenever possible, I will use my own games, not because they illustrate the point better, but because I know them thoroughly and can explain them more confidently than the games of others.
32. SOME POSSIBLE DEVELOPMENTS FROM A RUY LOPEZ
32. SOME POSSIBLE DEVELOPMENTS FROM A RUY LOPEZ
That some of the variations in the openings and the manœuvres in the middle-game are often based on some of the elementary principles just expounded can be easily seen in the following case:
That some of the changes in the openings and the moves in the middle game are often based on some of the basic principles just explained can be easily seen in the following case:
Example 65.
Example 65.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - Q B 3 | |
3. B - Kt 5 | P - Q R 3 | |
4. B - R 4 | Kt - B 3 | |
5. O - O | Kt × P | |
6. P - Q 4 | P - Q Kt 4 | |
7. B - Kt 3 | P - Q 4 | |
8. P × P | B - K 3 | |
9. P - B 3 | B - K 2 | |
10. R - K 1 | Kt - B 4 | |
11. B - B 2 | B - Kt 5 | |
12. Q Kt - Q 2 | O - O | |
13. Kt - Kt 3 | Kt - K 3 |
So far a very well-known variation of the Ruy Lopez. In fact, they are the moves of the Janowski-Lasker game in Paris, 1912.
So far, this is a very well-known variation of the Ruy Lopez. In fact, these are the moves from the Janowski-Lasker game in Paris, 1912.
14. Q - Q 3 | P - Kt 3 |
Let us suppose the game went on, and that in some way White, by playing one of the Knights to Q 4 at the proper time, forced the exchange of both Knights, and then afterwards both the Bishops were exchanged, and we arrived at some such position as shown in the following diagram. (I obtained such a position in a very similar way once at Lodz in Poland. I was playing the White pieces against a consulting team headed by Salwe.)
Let’s imagine the game continued, and at some point, White, by moving one of the Knights to Q 4 at just the right moment, forced the exchange of both Knights. Then later, both Bishops were also exchanged, and we reached a position similar to the one shown in the following diagram. (I achieved a similar position once in Lodz, Poland. I was playing as White against a consulting team led by Salwe.)
Now we would have here the case of the backward Q B P, which will in no way be able to advance to Q B 4. Such a position may be said to be theoretically lost, and in practice a first-class master will invariably win it from Black. (If I may be excused the reference, I will say that I won the game above referred to.)
Now we have the situation of the backward Q B P, which won't be able to advance to Q B 4. This position is practically lost, and a top-level player will always win it when playing as Black. (If you'll allow me to mention it, I won the game I just referenced.)
The Black pieces can be said to be fixed. If White plays Q - Q B 3, Black must answer Q - Q 2, otherwise he will lose a Pawn, and if White returns with the Queen to Q R 3 Black will have again to return to Q Kt 2 with the Queen or lose a Pawn. Thus Black can only move according to White's lead, and under such conditions White can easily advance with his Pawns to K B 4 and K Kt 4, until Black will be forced to stop P - B 5 by playing P - K B 4, and we might finally have some such position as this:
The Black pieces are pretty much stuck. If White plays Q-QB3, Black has to respond with Q-Q2, or else he'll lose a Pawn. If White then moves the Queen back to QR3, Black will again have to move the Queen back to QKt2 or lose another Pawn. This means Black can only move based on what White does, and under these conditions, White can easily push his Pawns to KB4 and KKt4, until Black is forced to stop P-B5 by playing P-KB4, and we might eventually reach a position like this:
Example 66.
Example 66.
In this situation the game might go on as follows:
In this situation, the game could proceed like this:
1. P × P, P × P; 2. Q - K B 3, Q - Q 2
1. P × P, P × P; 2. Q - K B 3, Q - Q 2
White threatened to win a Pawn by Q × P, and Black could not play 2...R - K B 1, because 3 R × B P would also win a Pawn at least.
White threatened to win a pawn by Q x P, and Black couldn't play 2...R - KB1, because 3 R x BP would also win a pawn at least.
3. R (B 5) - B 2, | R - Kt 3; | ||
4. R - Kt 2, | K - R 1; | ||
5. R (B 1) - K Kt 1, | R (B 1) - K Kt 1; | ||
6. Q - R 5, | R × R; | ||
7. R × R, | R × R; | ||
8. K × R, | Q - Kt 2 ch; | ||
9. K - R 2, | Q - Kt 3; | ||
10. Q × Q, | P × Q; | ||
11. P - Kt 4, and White wins. |
Now suppose that in the position in the preceding diagram it were Black's move, and he played R - K B 1. White would then simply defend his K B P by some move like Q - K B 3, threatening R × Q B P, and then he would bring his King up to Kt 3, and when the time came, break through, as in the previous case. White might even be able to obtain the following position:
Now imagine that in the position shown in the previous diagram, it’s Black’s turn and he plays R-KB1. White would then just defend his KB pawn with a move like Q-KB3, threatening R×QBP, and then he would move his King up to K3, and when the moment is right, break through, just like in the earlier scenario. White might even be able to reach the following position:
Black would now be forced to play R - B 1, and White could then play Q - B 2, and follow it up with K B 3, and thus force Black to play P × P, which would give White a greater advantage.
Black would now have to play R-B1, and White could then play Q-B2, followed by KB3, forcing Black to play P×P, which would give White an even bigger advantage.
A careful examination of all these positions will reveal that, besides the advantage of freedom of manœuvre on White's part, the power of the Pawn at K 5 is enormous, and that it is the commanding position of this Pawn, and the fact that it is free to advance, once all the pieces are exchanged, that constitute the pivot of all White's manœuvres.
A close look at all these positions shows that, besides giving White the flexibility to move, the power of the Pawn on K 5 is immense. It's the strong position of this Pawn and its ability to advance after all the pieces are swapped that form the basis of all of White's strategies.
I have purposely given positions without the moves which lead to them so that the student may become accustomed to build up in his own mind possible positions that may arise (out of any given situation). Thus he will learn to make strategical plans and be on his way to the master class. The student can derive enormous benefit by further practice of this kind.
I’ve intentionally provided positions without the moves that lead to them so that the student can get used to imagining possible positions that could arise from any situation. This way, they will learn to make strategic plans and be on their way to the master class. The student can gain a lot from continuing to practice like this.
33. THE INFLUENCE OF A "HOLE"
33. THE INFLUENCE OF A "HOLE"
Example 67.—In order to further illustrate this point, I now give a game played in the Havana International Masters Tournament of 1913. (Queen's Gambit Declined.) White: D. Janowski. Black: A. Kupchick.
Example 67.—To further illustrate this point, I will now present a game played in the Havana International Masters Tournament of 1913. (Queen's Gambit Declined.) White: D. Janowski. Black: A. Kupchick.
1. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
2. P - Q B 4 | P - K 3 | |
3. Kt - Q B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
4. B - Kt 5 | B - K 2 | |
5. P - K 3 | Q Kt - Q 2 | |
6. B - Q 3 | P × P | |
7. B × P | Kt - Kt 3 |
Of course the idea is to post a Knight at Q 4, but as it is the other Knight which will be posted there this manœuvre does not seem logical. The Knight at Kt 3 does nothing except to prevent the development of his own Q B. The normal course O - O, followed by P - Q B 4, is more reasonable. For a beautiful illustration of how to play White in that variation, see the Janowski-Rubinstein game of the St. Petersburg Tournament of 1914.
Of course, the plan is to place a Knight at Q 4, but since it's actually the other Knight that will go there, this move doesn't seem to make sense. The Knight at Kt 3 does nothing except block the development of its own Q B. A more sensible approach would be to castle O-O, followed by P-Q B 4. For a great example of how to play White in that variation, check out the Janowski-Rubinstein game from the St. Petersburg Tournament of 1914.
8. B - Q 3 |
B - Kt 3 has some points in its favour in this position, the most important being the possibility of advancing the King's Pawn immediately after 8. ... K Kt - Q 4; 9 B × B, Q × B.
B - Kt 3 has some advantages in this position, the most significant being the ability to move the King's Pawn right after 8. ... K Kt - Q 4; 9 B × B, Q × B.
8. ........ | K Kt - Q 4 | |
9. B × B | Q × B | |
10. Kt - B 3 |
Had White's Bishop been at Q Kt 3 he could now play P - K 4 as indicated in the previous note, a move which he cannot make in the present position, because of Kt - K B 5 threatening, not only the K Kt P, but also Kt × B ch. As White's King's Bishop should never be exchanged in this opening without a very good reason White therefore cannot play P - K 4.
Had White's bishop been at QKt3, he could now play P-K4 as mentioned in the previous note, a move he can't make in the current position due to Kt-KB5 threatening not only the KKtP but also Kt×B check. Since White's King's bishop should never be exchanged in this opening without a really good reason, he therefore cannot play P-K4.
10. ........ | O - O | |
11. O - O | B - Q 2 | |
12. R - B 1 |
White is perfectly developed, and now threatens to win a Pawn as follows: Kt × Kt, Kt × Kt; P - K 4, followed by R × P.
White is fully developed and now risks winning a Pawn like this: Knight takes Knight, Knight takes Knight; Pawn to King 4, followed by Rook takes Pawn.
12. ........ | P - Q B 3 |
The fact that Black is practically forced to make this move in order to avoid the loss of a Pawn is sufficient reason in itself to condemn the whole system of development on Black's part. In effect, he plays B - Q 2 and now he has to shut off the action of his {153}own Bishop, which thereby becomes little more than a Pawn for a while. In fact, it is hard to see how this Bishop will ever be able to attack anything. Besides, it can be easily seen that White will soon post his two Knights at K 5 and Q B 5 respectively, and that Black will not be able to dislodge them without seriously weakening his game, if he can do it at all. From all these reasons it can be gathered that it would probably have been better for Black to play Kt × Kt and thus get rid of one of the two White Knights before assuming such a defensive position. In such cases, the less the number of pieces on the board, the better chances there are to escape.
The fact that Black practically has to make this move to avoid losing a Pawn is enough to criticize his entire development strategy. Essentially, he plays B - Q 2 and now has to block his own Bishop, turning it into little more than a Pawn for a time. In reality, it's hard to see how this Bishop will ever pose a threat. Plus, it's clear that White will soon position his two Knights at K 5 and Q B 5 respectively, which Black won't be able to remove without significantly weakening his position, if he can do it at all. From all these points, it seems likely that it would have been better for Black to play Kt × Kt to get rid of one of the two White Knights before taking such a defensive stance. In these situations, having fewer pieces on the board increases the chances of escape.
13. Kt - K 4 | P - K B 4 |
This practically amounts to committing suicide, since it creates a hole at K 5 for White's Knight, from where it will be practically impossible to dislodge him. If Black intended to make such a move he should have done it before, when at least there would have been an object in preventing the White Knight from reaching B 5.
This is almost like committing suicide because it opens up a spot at K 5 for White's Knight, making it nearly impossible to get him out of there. If Black was planning to make this move, he should have done it earlier when there was still a reason to stop the White Knight from getting to B 5.
14. Kt - B 5 | B - K 1 | |
15. Kt - K 5 |
15. ........ | R - Kt 1 |
There is no object in this move, unless it is to be followed by Kt - Q 2. As that is not the case, he might have gone with the Rook to B 1, as he does later.
There’s no purpose to this move unless it's followed by Kt - Q 2. Since that’s not the case, he could have moved the Rook to B 1, as he does later.
16. R - K 1 | R - B 3 | |
17. Q - B 3 | R - R 3 | |
18. Q - Kt 3 | R - B 1 |
White threatened to win the exchange by playing either Kt - B 7 or Kt - Kt 4.
White threatened to win the exchange by playing either Knight to Bishop 7 or Knight to Knight 4.
19. P - B 3 | R - B 2 | |
20. P - Q R 3 | K - R 1 | |
21. P - R 3 |
21. ........ | P - Kt 4 | |
22. P - K 4 | P - B 5 | |
23. Q - B 2 | Kt - K 6 |
He had better have played Kt - B 3; and tried later on to get rid of White's Knights by means of Kt - Q 2.
He should have played Knight to B3 and later tried to get rid of White's Knights by moving Knight to Queen 2.
24. R × Kt |
with this sacrifice of the Rook for a Knight and Pawn White obtains an overwhelming position.
With this sacrifice of the Rook for a Knight and Pawn, White gains an overwhelming position.
24. ........ | P × R | |
25. Q × P | Kt - B 1 |
Kt - Q 2 was better in order to get rid of one of the two White Knights. There were, however, any number of good replies to it, among them the following: Kt (B 5) × Kt, B × Kt; Q × P, Q × Q; Kt - B 7 ch, K - Kt 2; Kt × Q, and with two Pawns for the exchange, and the position so much in his favour, White should have no trouble in winning. {156}
Kt - Q 2 was a better move to eliminate one of the two White Knights. However, there were many good responses to it, including the following: Kt (B 5) × Kt, B × Kt; Q × P, Q × Q; Kt - B 7 ch, K - Kt 2; Kt × Q. With two Pawns for the exchange and the position heavily in his favor, White should have no trouble winning. {156}
26. Kt - Kt 4 | R - Kt 3 | |
27. P - K 5 | R - Kt 2 | |
28. B - B 4 | B - B 2 |
All these moves are practically forced, and as it is easily seen they tie up Black's position more and more. White's manœuvres from move 24 onwards are highly instructive.
All these moves are pretty much forced, and it’s clear that they restrict Black's position more and more. White's maneuvers from move 24 onward are very instructive.
29. Kt - B 6 | Kt - Kt 3 |
This wandering Knight has done nothing throughout the game.
This wandering knight hasn't done anything throughout the game.
30. Kt (B5) - K 4 | P - K R 3 | |
31. P - K R 4 | Kt - Q 4 | |
32. Q - Q 2 | R - Kt 3 | |
33. P × P | Q - B 1 |
If P × P; K - B 2, and Black would be helpless.
If P × P; K - B 2, then Black would be defenseless.
34. P - B 4 | Kt - K 2 | |
35. P - K Kt 4 | P × P | |
36. P × P | Resigns. |
There is nothing to be done. If B - Kt 1; Q - R 2 ch, K - Kt 2; B × P.
There is nothing to be done. If B - Kt 1; Q - R 2 ch, K - Kt 2; B × P.
The student should notice that, apart from other things, White throughout the game has had control of the Black squares, principally those at K 5 and Q B 5.
The student should notice that, among other things, White has maintained control of the Black squares throughout the game, mainly those at K5 and QB5.
From now on to the end of the book I shall give a collection of my games both lost and won, chosen so as to serve as illustrations of the general principles laid down in the foregoing pages.
From now until the end of the book, I will present a selection of my games, both those I've lost and those I've won, chosen to illustrate the general principles discussed in the previous pages.
PART II
GAME 1. QUEEN'S GAMBIT DECLINED
Game 1: Queen's Gambit Declined
(Match, 1909)
(Match, 1909)
White: F. J. Marshall. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
White: F. J. Marshall. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
2. P - Q B 4 | P - K 3 | |
3. Kt - Q B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
4. B - Kt 5 | B - K 2 | |
5. P - K 3 | Kt - K 5 |
I had played this defence twice before in the match with good results, and although I lost this game I still played it until the very last game, when I changed my tactics. The reason was my total lack of knowledge of the different variations in this opening, coupled with the fact that I knew that Dr. E. Lasker had been successful with it against Marshall himself in 1907. I thought that since Dr. Lasker had played it so often, it should be good. The object is to exchange a couple of pieces and at the same time to bring about a position full of possibilities and with promising chances of success once the end-game stage is reached. On general principles it should be wrong, because the {160}same Knight is moved three times in the opening, although it involves the exchange of two pieces. In reality the difficulty in this variation, as well as in nearly all the variations of the Queen's gambit, lies in the slow development of Black's Queen Bishop. However, whether this variation can or cannot be safely played is a question still to be decided, and it is outside the scope of this book. I may add that at present my preference is for a different system of development, but it is not unlikely that I should some time come back to this variation.
I had used this defense twice before in the match with good results, and even though I lost this game, I continued playing it until the very last round when I changed my tactics. The reason was my complete lack of understanding of the different variations in this opening, combined with the fact that I knew Dr. E. Lasker had been successful with it against Marshall himself in 1907. I figured that since Dr. Lasker had used it so often, it must be a solid choice. The goal is to exchange a couple of pieces while also creating a position full of possibilities and promising chances of success once the endgame stage is reached. Generally, it seems wrong because the same Knight is moved three times in the opening, although it does involve the exchange of two pieces. In reality, the issue with this variation, like nearly all variations of the Queen's Gambit, is the slow development of Black's Queen Bishop. However, whether this variation can be played safely is still an open question, and it’s outside the focus of this book. I should mention that currently, I prefer a different development system, but it’s quite possible I might return to this variation at some point.
6. B × B | Q × B | |
7. B - Q 3 |
P × P is preferable for reasons that we shall soon see.
P × P is preferred for reasons that we will soon explore.
7. ........ | Kt × Kt | |
8. P × Kt | Kt - Q 2 |
Now P × P would be a better way to develop the game. The idea is that after 8...P × P; 9 B × B P, P - Q Kt 3, followed by B - Kt 2, would give Black's Bishop a powerful range. For this variation see the eleventh game of the match.
Now P × P would be a better way to develop the game. The idea is that after 8...P × P; 9 B × B P, P - Q Kt 3, followed by B - Kt 2, would give Black's Bishop a powerful range. For this variation see the eleventh game of the match.
9. Kt - B 3 | O - O |
10. P × P | P × P | |
11. Q - Kt 3 | Kt - B 3 | |
12. P - Q R 4 | P - B 4 |
Played with the intention of obtaining the majority of Pawns on the Queen's side. Yet it is doubtful whether this move is good, since it leaves Black's Queen's-side Pawns disrupted in a way. The safer course would have been to play P - B 3.
Played with the aim of securing most of the Pawns on the Queen's side. However, it's questionable if this move is effective, as it leaves Black's Queen-side Pawns somewhat disrupted. A safer option would have been to play P - B 3.
13. Q - R 3 | P - Q Kt 3 |
This exposes Black to further attack by P - R 5 without any compensation for it. If I had to play this position nowadays I would simply play 13...R - K 1. Then after 14 Q × P, Q × Q would follow, and I believe that Black would regain the Pawn. If, instead, White played 14 P × P then B - Kt 5 would give Black an excellent game.
This puts Black at risk of being attacked further by P-R5 without any compensation. If I were playing this position today, I would just play 13...R-K1. Then after 14 Q×P, Q×Q would happen, and I think Black would be able to recover the pawn. If White chose instead to play 14 P×P, then B-Kt5 would give Black a great chance at winning.
14. P - R 5 | B - Kt 2 | |
15. O - O | Q - B 2 | |
16. K R - Kt 1 | Kt - Q 2 |
Black's position was bad and perhaps lost in any case, but the text move makes matters worse. As a matter of fact I never saw White's reply B - B 5. It never even passed through my mind that this was threatened. Black's best move would have been 16...K R - Kt 1. If that loses, then any other move would lose as well.
Black's position was weak and probably lost anyway, but the actual move makes things worse. Honestly, I never noticed White's response B - B 5. It didn't even occur to me that this was a threat. Black's best move would have been 16...K R - Kt 1. If that loses, then any other move would lose too.
17. B - B 5 | K R - B 1 |
From bad to worse. Kt - B 3 offered the only hope.
From bad to worse. Kt - B 3 was the only hope.
18. B × Kt | Q × B | |
19. P - R 6 | B - B 3 | |
20. P × P | P × P | |
21. Q × P | Q R - Kt 1 |
The game was lost. One move was as good as another.
The game was lost. One move was just as good as another.
22. R × R | R × R | |
23. Kt - K 5 | Q - B 4 | |
24. P - K B 4 | R - Kt 3 | |
25. Q × R ! | Resigns. |
Of course, if 25 Kt × B, R - Kt 8 ch would have drawn. The text move is pretty and finishes quickly. A well-played game on Marshall's part.
Of course, if 25 Kt × B, R - Kt 8 ch had been played. The move is attractive and wraps up quickly. A well-executed game by Marshall.
GAME 2. QUEEN'S GAMBIT DECLINED
Game 2. Queen's Gambit Declined
(San Sebastian, 1911)
(San Sebastián, 1911)
White: A. K. Rubinstein. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
White: A. K. Rubinstein. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | P - Q B 4 | |
3. P - B 4 | P - K 3 | |
4. P × Q P | K P × P | |
5. Kt - B 3 | Kt -Q B 3 | |
6. P - K Kt 3 | B - K 3 |
Kt - B 3 is the normal move in this variation. White's development was first introduced by Schlechter and elaborated later on by Rubinstein. It aims at the isolation of Black's Q P, against which the White pieces are gradually concentrated. In making the text move I was trying to avoid the beaten track. Being a developing move there should be no objection to it in the way of general principles, except that the Knights ought to come out before the Bishops.
Kt - B 3 is the standard move in this variation. White's development was first introduced by Schlechter and later expanded on by Rubinstein. It focuses on isolating Black's Queen pawn, against which the White pieces are gradually aimed. By making this move, I intended to steer clear of the common path. Since it's a developing move, there shouldn't be any issues with it according to general principles, except that the Knights should come out before the Bishops.
7. B - Kt 2 | B - K 2 | |
8. O - O | R - B 1 |
In pursuance of the idea of changing the normal {164}course of this variation, but with very poor success. The move in theory ought to be unsound, since Black's K Kt is yet undeveloped. I had not yet learned of the attack founded on Kt - Kt 5 and the exchange of the B at K 3. Either Kt - B 3 or P - K R 3; to prevent either B or Kt - K Kt 5, was right.
In trying to change the usual approach to this variation, I had very little success. The move should be flawed in theory since Black's Knight is still undeveloped. I hadn't yet learned about the attack based on Knight to Knight 5 and the exchange of the Bishop at Knight 3. Either Knight to Bishop 3 or Pawn to King Rook 3 was the right choice to stop either the Bishop or Knight to King Knight 5.
9. P X P | B × P | |
10. Kt - K Kt 5 | Kt - B 3 | |
11. Kt × B | P × Kt | |
12. B - R 3 | Q - K 2 | |
13. B - Kt 5 | O - O |
This is a mistake. The right move was R - Q 1 in order to get the Rook away from the line of the Bishop at R 3 and at the same time to support the Q P. Incidentally it shows that White failed to take proper advantage of Black's weak opening moves. Against the text move White makes a very fine combination {165}which I had seen, but which I thought could be defeated.
This is a mistake. The correct move was R-Q1 to get the Rook away from the Bishop's line at R3 while also supporting the QP. By the way, this shows that White didn't fully capitalize on Black's weak opening moves. In response to the move White made, there’s a great combination {165} that I noticed, but I thought it could be countered.
14. B × Kt | Q × B |
I considered P × B, which it seemed would give me a playable game, but I thought White's combination unsound and therefore let him play it, to my lasting regret.
I thought about P × B, which seemed like it would give me a playable game, but I believed White's move was flawed and decided to let him take it, which I still regret.
15. Kt × P ! | Q - R 3 |
16. K - Kt 2 ! |
This is the move which I had not considered. I thought that Rubinstein would have to play B - Kt 2, when I had in mind the following winning combination: 16 B - Kt 2, Kt - K 4 ! 17 Kt - B 4 (if R - B 1, Q × R !! Q × Q, B × P ch wins), Kt - Kt 5; 18 P - K R 3 (if Kt - R 3, B × P ch wins the exchange), Kt × P; 19 R × Kt, B × R ch; 20 K × B, P - K Kt 4, and Black should win. It is curious that this combination has been overlooked. It has been taken for granted that I did not see the 17th move Q - B 1.
This is the move I hadn't thought about. I assumed that Rubinstein would have to play B - Kt 2, while I was planning the following winning combination: 16 B - Kt 2, Kt - K 4 ! 17 Kt - B 4 (if R - B 1, Q × R !! Q × Q, B × P ch wins), Kt - Kt 5; 18 P - K R 3 (if Kt - R 3, B × P ch wins the exchange), Kt × P; 19 R × Kt, B × R ch; 20 K × B, P - K Kt 4, and Black should win. It's interesting that this combination has been missed. It’s been assumed that I didn’t notice the 17th move Q - B 1.
16. ........ | Q R - Q 1 |
After White's last move there was nothing for me to do but submit to the inevitable.
After White's last move, I had no choice but to accept what was going to happen.
17. Q - B 1 ! | P × Kt | |
18. Q × B | Q - Q 7 | |
19. Q - Kt 5 | Kt - Q 5 | |
20. Q - Q 3 | Q × Q | |
21. P × Q | K R - K 1 | |
22. B - Kt 4 |
22. ........ | R - Q 3 | |
23. K R - K 1 | R × R | |
24. R × R | R - Q Kt 3 | |
25. R - K 5 | R × P | |
26. R × P | Kt - B 3 | |
27. B - K 6 ch | K - B 1 | |
28. R - B 5 ch | K - K 1 | |
29. B - B 7 ch | K - Q 2 | |
30. B - B 4 |
30. ........ | P - Q R 3 |
A bad move, which gives away any legitimate chance Black had to draw. It loses a very important move. In fact, as the course of the game will show, it loses several moves. The proper way was to play K - Q 3. If then R - Q Kt 5, R × R; B × R, Kt - Q 5; followed by P - Q Kt 4; and White would have an exceedingly difficult game to draw on account of the dominating position of the Knight at {168}Q 5 in conjunction with the extra Pawn on the Queen's side and the awkward position of White's King. (See how this is so.)
A bad move that completely ruins any legitimate chance Black had to draw. It loses a very crucial move. In fact, as the game unfolds, it loses several moves. The right move would have been to play K - Q 3. If then R - Q Kt 5, R × R; B × R, Kt - Q 5; followed by P - Q Kt 4; and White would have a really tough game to draw because of the dominating position of the Knight at {168}Q 5 along with the extra Pawn on the Queen's side and the awkward position of White's King. (See how this is so.)
31. R - B 7 ch | K - Q 3 | |
32. R × K Kt P | P - Kt 4 | |
33. B - Kt 8 | P - Q R 4 | |
34. R × P | P - R 5 | |
35. P - R 4 | P - Kt 5 | |
36. R - R 6 ch | K - B 4 | |
37. R - R 5 ch | K - Kt 3 | |
38. B - Q 5 |
With these last three moves White again gives Black a chance. Even before the last move B - B 4 would have won with comparative ease, but the text move is a downright blunder, of which, fortunately for him, Black does not avail himself.
With these last three moves, White once again gives Black an opportunity. Even before the last move, B - B 4 would have easily secured a win, but the current move is a clear mistake that, thankfully for him, Black doesn’t take advantage of.
38. ........ | P - Kt 6 |
R × P would make it practically impossible for White to win, if he can win at all. White's best {169}continuation then would have been: 39 B - B 4, R - B 7; 40 R - Kt 5 ch, K - B 2; 41 B - Kt 8, P - R 6; 42 P - R 5, P - R 7; 43 B × P, R × B, and if there is a win it is very difficult to find it, as against 44 P - R 6, R - R 3 ! offers excellent chances for a draw.
R × P would make it almost impossible for White to win, if he can win at all. White's best {169}move then would have been: 39 B - B 4, R - B 7; 40 R - Kt 5 ch, K - B 2; 41 B - Kt 8, P - R 6; 42 P - R 5, P - R 7; 43 B × P, R × B, and if there is a win, it's very hard to spot it, since 44 P - R 6, R - R 3 ! provides great chances for a draw.
39. P × P | P - R 6 | |
40. B × Kt | R × Kt P |
If 40...P - R 7; 41 R - Kt 5 ch, K - R 3; 42 R - Kt 8.
If 40...P - R 7; 41 R - Kt 5 ch, K - R 3; 42 R - Kt 8.
41. B - Q 5 | P - R 7 | |
42. R - R 6 ch | Resigns. |
As an end game, this is rather a sad exhibition for two masters. The redeeming feature of the game is Rubinstein's fine combination in the middle game, beginning with 14 B × Kt.
As an endgame, this is quite a disappointing display for two masters. The highlight of the game is Rubinstein's excellent combination in the middle game, starting with 14 B × Kt.
GAME 3. IRREGULAR DEFENCE
GAME 3. UNCONVENTIONAL DEFENSE
(Havana, 1913)
(Havana, 1913)
White: D. Janowski. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
White: D. Janowski. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - Q 4 | Kt - K B 3 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | P - Q 3 | |
3. B - Kt 5 | Q Kt - Q 2 | |
4. P - K 3 | P - K 4 | |
5. Kt - B 3 | P - B 3 | |
6. B - Q 3 | B - K 2 | |
7. Q - K 2 | Q - R 4 | |
8. O - O | Kt - B 1 | |
9. K R - Q 1 | B - Kt 5 |
At last Black is on his way to obtain full development. The idea of this irregular opening is mainly to throw White on his own resources. At the time the game was played, the system of defence was not as well known as the regular forms of the Queen's Pawn openings. Whether it is sound or not remains yet to be proved. Its good features are that it keeps the centre intact without creating any particular weakness, and that it gives plenty of opportunity for deep and concealed manœuvring. The drawback is the long time it takes Black to develop his game. It is natural to suppose that White will employ that time to prepare a well-conceived attack, or that he will use the advantage of his development actually to prevent Black's complete development, or failing that, to obtain some definite material advantage.
At last, Black is on his way to fully developing his position. The purpose of this unconventional opening is mainly to force White to rely on their own strategy. When this game was played, the defensive approach wasn't as well understood as the standard Queen's Pawn openings. Whether it's a solid strategy remains to be seen. Its strengths are that it keeps the center intact without creating any specific weaknesses and allows for a lot of deep, subtle maneuvering. The downside is that it takes Black a long time to develop their pieces. It's reasonable to assume that White will use this time to prepare a well-planned attack, or to leverage their development advantage to hinder Black's complete development, or, if that fails, to gain a clear material advantage.
10. P - K R 3 | B - R 4 | |
11. P × P | P × P | |
12. Kt - K 4 |
12. ........ | Kt × Kt |
A very serious mistake. I considered castling, which was the right move, but desisted because I was afraid that by playing 13 B × Kt, P × B; 14 Kt - Kt 3, B - Kt 3; 15 Kt - B 5, White would obtain a winning position for the end game. Whether right or wrong this shows how closely related are all parts of the game, and consequently how one will influence the other.
A huge mistake. I thought about castling, which was the right move, but I held back because I was worried that if I played 13 B × Kt, P × B; 14 Kt - Kt 3, B - Kt 3; 15 Kt - B 5, White would end up with a winning position for the endgame. Right or wrong, this shows how interconnected all parts of the game are, and how one will affect the others.
13. B × B | K × B | |
14. B × Kt | B - Kt 3 |
Not good. The natural and proper move would have been Kt - K 3, in order to bring all the Black pieces into play. B × Kt at once was also good, as it would have relieved the pressure against Black's King's Pawn, and at the same time have simplified the game.
Not good. The natural and appropriate move would have been Knight to King 3, in order to activate all the Black pieces. Taking the Knight right away was also good, as it would have eased the pressure on Black's King's Pawn and simultaneously simplified the game.
Here it is seen how failure to comply with the elementary logical reasons, that govern any given position, often brings the player into trouble. I was no doubt influenced in my choice of moves by the fear of B - B 5, which was a very threatening move.
Here it’s clear that not following basic logical reasoning that applies to any situation can often get the player into trouble. I was definitely influenced by my fear of B - B 5, which was a really threatening move.
15. Q - B 4 | Kt - K 3 | |
16. P - Q Kt 4 | Q - B 2 | |
17. B × B | R P × B | |
18. Q - K 4 | K - B 3 |
19. R - Q 3 |
P - K R 4, to be followed by P - Kt 4, might have been a more vigorous way to carry on the attack. Black's weak point is unquestionably the Pawn at K 4, which he is compelled to defend with the King. The text move aims at doubling the Rooks, with the ultimate object of placing one of them at Q 6, supported by a Pawn at Q B 5, Black could only stop this by playing P - B 4 which would create a "hole" at Q 5; or by playing P - Kt 3, which would tie the Black Queen to the defence of the Q B P as well as the K P, which she already defends. Black, however, can meet all this by offering the exchange of Rooks, which destroys White's plans. For this reason P - K R 4 appears the proper way to carry on the attack.
P-KR4, followed by P-Kt4, could have been a stronger way to continue the attack. Black's weak point is definitely the Pawn at K4, which he has to defend with the King. The current move aims to double the Rooks, with the ultimate goal of placing one of them at Q6, backed by a Pawn at QB5. Black can only prevent this by playing P-B4, which would create a "hole" at Q5, or by playing P-Kt3, which would tie the Black Queen to defending the QB Pawn as well as the K Pawn, which she is already defending. However, Black can counter all this by offering to exchange Rooks, which disrupts White's plans. For this reason, P-KR4 seems like the best way to continue the attack.
19. ........ | Q R - Q 1 | |
20. Q R - Q 1 | P - K Kt 4 |
21. P - B 4 | R × R |
P - K Kt 3 would have left Black with a perfectly safe game.
P - K Kt 3 would have left Black with a completely safe game.
22. R × R | R - Q 1 |
A very serious mistake, which loses a Pawn. P - K Kt 3 was the right move, and would have left Black with a very good game. In fact, if it should come to a simple ending, the position of the Black King would be an advantage.
A major mistake that results in losing a Pawn. P-KKt3 was the correct move and would have given Black a strong position. In fact, if it comes down to a straightforward ending, the position of the Black King would be advantageous.
23. R × R | Kt × R |
24. P - K R 4 |
24. ........ | P × P | |
25. Q × P ch | K - K 3 | |
26. Q - Kt 4 ch | K - B 3 | |
27. Q - Kt 5 ch | K - K 3 | |
28. Q × P | Q - Q 3 | |
29. P - B 5 | Q - Q 4 | |
30. P K 4 ! | Q - Q 8 ch | |
31. K - R 2 | P - B 3 | |
32. Q - Kt 4 ch ! | K - K 2 | |
33. Kt × P | Q × Q | |
34. Kt × Q | Kt - K 3 | |
35. P - K 5 | P × P | |
36. Kt × P | Kt - Q 5 |
The game went on for a few more moves, and, there being no way to counteract the advance of White's two passed Pawns, Black resigned.
The game continued for a few more moves, but with no way to stop the progress of White's two passed pawns, Black resigned.
GAME 4. FRENCH DEFENCE
Game 4: French Defense
(St. Petersburg, 1913)
(St. Petersburg, 1913)
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: E. A. Snosko-Borovski.
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: E. A. Snosko-Borovski.
1. P - Q 4 | P - K 3 | |
2. P - K 4 | P - Q 4 | |
3. Kt - Q B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
4. B - Kt 5 | B - Kt 5 |
5. P × P |
At the time this game was played the variation 5 P - K 5 was in vogue, but I considered then, as I do now, the text move to be the stronger.
At the time this game was played, the move 5 P - K 5 was popular, but I thought then, as I do now, that the text move is the stronger one.
5. ........ | Q × P |
This is considered superior to P × P. It has for its object, as I said before, to take the initiative away from White by disrupting White's Queen's side. White, however, has more than ample compensation through his breaking up Black's King's side. It might be laid down as a principle of the opening that the breaking up of the King's side is of more importance than a similar occurrence on the Queen's side.
This is seen as better than P × P. Its goal, as I mentioned earlier, is to take control away from White by disrupting White's queenside. However, White has plenty of compensation by attacking Black's kingside. It could be stated as a rule of the opening that breaking up the kingside is more important than a similar situation on the queenside.
6. B × Kt | B × Kt ch | |
7. P × B | P × B | |
8. Kt - B 3 | P - Q Kt 3 |
The plan of Black in this variation is to post his Bishop on the long diagonal so as to be able later on, in conjunction with the action of his Rooks along the open K Kt's file, to make a violent attack against White's King. It is, of course, expected that White will Castle on the King's side because of the broken-up condition of his Queen's side Pawns. {176}
The strategy for Black in this variation is to place his Bishop on the long diagonal, allowing him to later launch a strong attack against White's King, supported by his Rooks moving along the open K Kt's file. Naturally, it's anticipated that White will Castle on the King's side due to the disorganized state of his Queen's side Pawns. {176}
9. Q - Q 2 | B - Kt 2 | |
10. B - K 2 | Kt - Q 2 | |
11. P - B 4 | Q - K B 4 | |
12. O - O - O |
An original idea, I believe, played for the first time in a similar position in a game against Mr. Walter Penn Shipley, of Philadelphia. My idea is that as there is no Black Bishop and because Black's pieces have been developed with a view to an attack on the King's side, it will be impossible for Black to take advantage of the apparently unprotected position of White's King. Two possibilities must be considered. Firstly: If Black Castles on the Queen's side, as in this game, it is evident that there is no danger of an attack. Secondly: If Black Castles on the King's side, White begins the attack first, taking advantage of the awkward position of Black's Queen. In addition to the attacking probabilities of the text move, White in one move brings his King into safety and brings one of his Rooks into play. Thus he gains several moves, "tempi" as they are called, which will serve him to develop whatever plan he may wish to evolve.
An original idea, I believe, was first played in a similar position in a game against Mr. Walter Penn Shipley from Philadelphia. My idea is that since there’s no Black Bishop and Black's pieces have been positioned for an attack on the King's side, it will be impossible for Black to take advantage of what seems like an unprotected position of White's King. Two scenarios need to be considered. Firstly: If Black Castles on the Queen's side, as in this game, it’s clear that there’s no risk of an attack. Secondly: If Black Castles on the King's side, White starts the attack first, taking advantage of Black's awkward Queen position. In addition to the attacking chances of the move in the text, White simultaneously secures his King and activates one of his Rooks. This way, he gains several moves, known as "tempi," which will help him develop whatever strategy he wants to pursue.
12. ........ | O - O - O | |
13. Q - K 3 | K R - Kt 1 | |
14. P - Kt 3 | Q - Q R 4 |
15. R - Q 3 ! | K - Kt 1 | |
16. K R - Q 1 | Q - K B 4 |
17. Kt - R 4 |
This move has been criticised because it puts the Knight out of the way for a few moves. But by forcing Q - K Kt 4; White gains a very important move with P - B 4, which not only consolidates his position, but also drives the Queen away, putting it out of the game for the moment. Certainly the Queen is far more valuable than the Knight, to say nothing of the time gained and the freedom of action obtained thereby for White's more important pieces.
This move has been criticized because it sidelines the Knight for a few turns. However, by pushing Q-KKt4, White secures a crucial move with P-B4, which not only strengthens his position but also pushes the Queen away, temporarily taking it out of the game. Clearly, the Queen is much more valuable than the Knight, not to mention the time gained and the increased freedom for White's more important pieces.
17. ........ | Q - K Kt 4 | |
18. P - B 4 | Q - Kt 2 | |
19. B - B 3 |
In such positions it is generally very advantageous to get rid of the Black Bishop controlling his Q R 3 and Q B 3, which form "holes" for White's pieces. The Bishop in such positions is of very great defensive value, hence the advantage of getting rid of it.
In these situations, it's usually very beneficial to eliminate the Black Bishop that's controlling his Q R 3 and Q B 3, which create "holes" for White's pieces. The Bishop in these positions is highly valuable for defense, so removing it offers a significant advantage.
19. ........ | K R - K 1 | |
20. B × B | K × B | |
21. P - Q B 5 ! | P - B 3 |
White threatened P - B 6 ch.
White threatened P - B 6 ch.
22. Kt - B 3 | Q - B 1 |
To prevent the Knight from moving to Q 6 via Q 2 and K 4 or Q B 4. It is self-evident that White has a great advantage of position.
To stop the Knight from moving to Q 6 via Q 2 and K 4 or Q B 4, it's clear that White has a strong positional advantage.
23. Kt - Q 2 ? |
23. ........ | P × P | |
24. Kt - B 4 |
Kt - K 4 or Kt - Kt 3 would have brought about an ending advantageous to White.
Kt - K 4 or Kt - Kt 3 would have led to an outcome favorable for White.
24. ........ | Kt - Kt 3 | |
25. Kt - R 5 ch | K - R 1 | |
26. P × P | Kt - Q 4 | |
27. Q - Q 4 | R - B 1 |
If R - Kt 1; 28 Kt × P, R (Kt 1) - B 1; 29 Kt × P would win.
If R - Kt 1; 28 Kt × P, R (Kt 1) - B 1; 29 Kt × P would win.
28. P - B 4 |
Kt - B 4 was the right move. I was, however, still looking for the "grand combination," and thought that the Pawn I would later on have at Q 6 would win the game. Black deserves great credit for the way in which he conducted this exceedingly difficult {180}defence. He could easily have gone wrong any number of times, but from move 22 onwards he always played the best move.
Kt - B 4 was the right move. I was still searching for the "grand combination," thinking that the Pawn I would have later on at Q 6 would win the game. Black deserves a lot of credit for how he handled this really tough defense. He could have easily made mistakes many times, but starting from move 22, he always played the best move.
28. ........ | P - K 4 ! | |
29. Q - Kt 1 | P - K 5 | |
30. P × Kt | P × R | |
31. P - Q 6 | R - K 7 | |
32. P - Q 7 | R - B 7 ch | |
33. K - Kt 1 | R - Kt 1 ch | |
34. Kt - Kt 3 | Q - K 2 |
35. R × P |
The position is most interesting. I believe I lost here my last chance to win the game, and if that is true it would vindicate my judgment when, on move 28, I played P - B 4. The student can find out what would happen if White plays Q - Q 4 ! at once. I have gone over the following variations: 35 Q - Q 4, R × K R P (of course if R × B P, P - Q 8 wins); {181}36 Q × Q P ! R - Q 1; 37 Q - R 6, K - Kt 1 best (if Q - Q 5 ch; K - R 1, K - Kt 1; R - Q Kt 1 wins); 38 Q × B P and White will at least have a draw.
The position is really interesting. I think I lost my last chance to win the game here, and if that's true, it would justify my decision when, on move 28, I played P - B 4. The student can see what would happen if White plays Q - Q 4 right away. I've reviewed the following variations: 35 Q - Q 4, R × K R P (of course if R × B P, P - Q 8 wins); {181} 36 Q × Q P! R - Q 1; 37 Q - R 6, K - Kt 1 is best (if Q - Q 5 check; K - R 1, K - Kt 1; R - Q Kt 1 wins); 38 Q × B P and White will at least have a draw.
35. ........ | R - K 7 | |
36. Q - Q 4 | R - Q 1 | |
37. Q - R 4 | Q - K 5 | |
38. Q - R 6 | K - Kt 1 |
There is nothing to be done against this simple move, since White cannot play Kt - Q 4, because Q - R 8 mates.
There’s no way to counter this straightforward move, since White can’t play Kt - Q 4, because Q - R 8 results in checkmate.
39. K - B 1 | R × Q P | |
40. Kt - Q 4 | R - K 8 ch | |
Resigns. |
A very interesting battle.
An intriguing battle.
GAME 5. RUY LOPEZ
GAME 5. RUY LOPEZ
(St. Petersburg, 1914)
(St. Petersburg, 1914)
White: Dr. E. Lasker. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
White: Dr. E. Lasker. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - Q B 3 | |
3. B - Kt 5 | P - Q R 3 | |
4. B × Kt |
The object of this move is to bring about speedily a middle-game without Queens, in which White {182}has four Pawns to three on the King's side, while Black's superiority of Pawns on the other side is somewhat balanced by the fact that one of Black's Pawns is doubled. On the other hand, Black has the advantage of remaining with two Bishops while White has only one.
The goal of this move is to quickly reach a middle game without Queens, where White {182}has four Pawns compared to three on the King's side, while Black's extra Pawns on the other side are somewhat countered by one of Black's Pawns being doubled. On the flip side, Black benefits from having two Bishops while White has just one.
4. ........ | Q P × B | |
5. P - Q 4 | P × P | |
6. Q × P | Q × Q | |
7. Kt × Q | B - Q 3 |
Black's idea is to Castle on the King's side. His reason is that the King ought to remain on the weaker side to oppose later the advance of White's Pawns. Theoretically there is very much to be said in favour of this reasoning, but whether in practice that would be the best system would be rather difficult to prove. The student should notice that if now all the pieces were exchanged White would practically be a Pawn ahead, and would therefore have a won ending.
Black's plan is to castle on the king's side. He believes that the king should stay on the weaker side to counter White's advancing pawns later on. While there’s a lot of support for this idea in theory, proving its effectiveness in practice could be quite challenging. The student should observe that if all the pieces were exchanged now, White would essentially be a pawn ahead, leading to a winning endgame.
8. Kt - Q B 3 | Kt - K 2 |
A perfectly sound form of development. In any other form adopted the Black Kt could not be developed either as quickly or as well. K 2 is the natural position for the Black Kt in this variation, in order not to obstruct Black's Pawns, and also, in some eventualities, in order to go to K Kt 3. There is {183}also the possibility of its going to Q 5 via Q B 3 after P - Q B 4.
A solid way to develop. In any other form, the Black Knight wouldn't develop as quickly or effectively. K2 is the ideal spot for the Black Knight in this variation so it doesn't block Black's Pawns, and it can potentially move to K Kt 3 later on. There is also the possibility of it moving to Q 5 through Q B 3 after P - Q B 4.
9. O - O | O - O | |
10. P - B 4 |
This move I considered weak at the time, and I do still. It leaves the K P weak, unless it advances to K 5, and it also makes it possible for Black to pin the Kt by B - Q B 4.
This move seemed weak to me then, and I still think so. It leaves the K P vulnerable unless it moves to K 5, and it also allows Black to pin the Kt with B - QB 4.
10. ........ | R - K 1 |
Best. It threatens B - B 4; B - K 3, Kt - Q 4. It also prevents B - K 3 because of Kt - Q 4 or B 4.
Best. It threatens B - B 4; B - K 3, Kt - Q 4. It also blocks B - K 3 due to Kt - Q 4 or B 4.
11. Kt - Kt 3 | P - B 3 |
Preparatory to P - Q Kt 3, followed by P - Q B 4 and B - Kt 2 in conjunction with Kt - Kt 3, which would put White in great difficulties to meet the combined attack against the two centre Pawns.
Preparatory to P - Q Kt 3, followed by P - Q B 4 and B - Kt 2 in conjunction with Kt - Kt 3, which would put White in great difficulties to meet the combined attack against the two center Pawns.
12. P - B 5 |
It has been wrongly claimed that this wins the game, but I would like nothing better than to have such a position again. It required several mistakes on my part finally to obtain a lost position.
It has been incorrectly said that this wins the game, but I would love to have that position again. It took several mistakes on my part to end up in a lost position.
12. ........ | P - Q Kt 3 | |
13. B - B 4 |
13. ........ | B - Kt 2 |
Played against my better judgment. The right move of course was B × B. Dr. Lasker gives the following variation: 13...B × B; 14 R × B, P - B 4; 15 Q R - Q 1, B - Kt 2; 16 R - B 2, Q R - Q 1; 17 R × R, R × R; 18 R - Q 2, R × R; 19 Kt × R, and he claims that White has the best of it. But, as Niemzovitch pointed out immediately after the game, 16...Q R - Q 1 given in Dr. Lasker's variation, is not the best. If 16...Q R - B 1 ! then White will have great difficulty in drawing the game, {185}since there is no good way to stop Black from playing Kt - B 3, followed by Kt - K 4, threatening Kt - B 5. And should White attempt to meet this manœuvre by withdrawing the Kt at Kt 3; then the Black Knight can go to Q 5, and the White Pawn at K 4 will be the object of the attack. Taking Dr. Lasker's variation, however, whatever advantage there might be disappears at once if Black plays 19...Kt - B 3, threatening Kt - Kt 5 and also Kt - Q 5, neither of which can be stopped. If White answers 20 Kt - Q 5, Kt - Q 5 for Black will at least draw. In fact, after 19...Kt - B 3 Black threatens so many things that it is difficult to see how White can prevent the loss of one or more Pawns.
I played against my better judgment. The right move would have been B × B. Dr. Lasker provides the following variation: 13...B × B; 14 R × B, P - B 4; 15 Q R - Q 1, B - Kt 2; 16 R - B 2, Q R - Q 1; 17 R × R, R × R; 18 R - Q 2, R × R; 19 Kt × R, and he claims that White has the upper hand. However, as Niemzovitch pointed out right after the game, 16...Q R - Q 1 given in Dr. Lasker's variation is not the best move. If 16...Q R - B 1! then White will struggle to draw the game, {185} since there’s no effective way to stop Black from playing Kt - B 3, followed by Kt - K 4, which threatens Kt - B 5. And if White tries to counter this move by retreating the Kt to Kt 3, the Black Knight can move to Q 5, and the White Pawn at K 4 will be under attack. However, if we follow Dr. Lasker's variation, any advantage disappears immediately if Black plays 19...Kt - B 3, threatening Kt - Kt 5 and also Kt - Q 5, neither of which can be prevented. If White responds with 20 Kt - Q 5, then Kt - Q 5 for Black will at least lead to a draw. In fact, after 19...Kt - B 3, Black poses so many threats that it’s hard to see how White can avoid losing one or more Pawns.
14. B × B | P × B | |
15. Kt - Q 4 |
It is a curious but true fact that I did not see this move when I played 13...B - Kt 2, otherwise I would have played the right move 13...B × B.
It’s an interesting but true fact that I didn’t see this move when I played 13...B - Kt 2; otherwise, I would have made the right move, 13...B × B.
15. ........ | Q R - Q 1 |
The game is yet far from lost, as against the entry of the Knight, Black can later on play P - B 4, followed by P - Q 4.
The game is still far from over, as after the Knight comes in, Black can later play P - B 4, followed by P - Q 4.
16. Kt - K 6 | R - Q 2 | |
17. Q R - Q 1 |
I now was on the point of playing P - B 4, to be followed by P - Q 4, which I thought would give me a draw, but suddenly I became ambitious and thought that I could play the text move, 17...Kt - B 1, and later on sacrifice the exchange for the Knight at K 6, winning a Pawn for it, and leaving White's K P still weaker. I intended to carry this plan either before or after playing P - K Kt 4 as the circumstances demanded. Now let us analyse: 17...P - B 4. If 18 Kt - Q 5, B × Kt; 19 P × B, P - Q Kt 4; and a careful analysis will show that Black has nothing to fear. Black's plan in this case would be to work his Kt around to K 4, via Q B 1, Q Kt 3, and Q B 5 or Q 2. Again, 17...P - B 4; 18 R - B 2, P - Q 4; 19 P × P, B × P; 20 Kt × B (best, since if R (B 2) - Q 2, B × Kt give Black the advantage), R × Kt; 21 R × R, Kt × R; and there is no good reason why Black should lose.
I was about to play P-B4, followed by P-Q4, which I thought would lead to a draw. But then I got ambitious and decided to make the move 17...Kt-B1, planning to later sacrifice the exchange for the Knight at K6, gaining a Pawn in the process and making White's K Pawn even weaker. I intended to carry out this plan either before or after playing P-KKt4, depending on the situation. Now let's break it down: 17...P-B4. If 18 Kt-Q5, then B×Kt; 19 P×B, P-QKt4; and a careful analysis shows that Black has nothing to worry about. Black's strategy here would be to maneuver the Knight to K4, using QB1, QKt3, and QB5 or Q2. Again, 17...P-B4; 18 R-B2, P-Q4; 19 P×P, B×P; 20 Kt×B (the best move, since if R(B2)-Q2, then B×Kt gives Black the advantage), R×Kt; 21 R×R, Kt×R; and there’s no good reason for Black to lose.
17. ........ | Kt - B 1 | |
18. R - B 2 | P - Q Kt 4 | |
{187} | 19. K R - Q 2 | R (Q 2) - K 2 |
20. P - Q Kt 4 | K - B 2 | |
21. P - Q R 3 | B - R 1 |
Once more changing my plan and this time without any good reason. Had I now played R × Kt; P × R ch, R × P; as I intended to do when I went back with the Knight to B 1, I doubt very much if White would have been able to win the game. At least it would have been extremely difficult.
Once again, I'm altering my strategy and this time without a solid reason. If I had played R × Kt; P × R ch, R × P, as I intended when I moved the Knight back to B1, I really doubt White could have won the game. At the very least, it would have been very challenging.
22. K - B 2 | R - R 2 | |
23. P - Kt 4 | P - R 3 | |
24. R - Q 3 | P - Q R 4 | |
25. P - K R 4 | P × P | |
26. P × P | R (R 2) - K 2 |
This, of course, has no object now. Black, with a bad game, flounders around for a move. It would have been better to play R - R 6 to keep the open file, and at the same time to threaten to come out with the Knight at Kt 3 and B 5.
This, of course, doesn't have any purpose now. Black, struggling with a poor game, is lost for a move. It would have been better to play R - R6 to maintain the open file and at the same time threaten to come out with the Knight at Kt3 and B5.
27. K - B 3 | R - Kt 1 | |
28. K - B 4 | P - Kt 3 |
Again bad. White's last two moves were weak, since the White King does nothing here. He should have played his Rook to Kt 3 on the 27th move. Black now should have played P - Kt 4 ch. After missing this chance White has it all his own way, and finishes the game most accurately, and Black becomes more {188}helpless with each move. The game needs no further comment, excepting that my play throughout was of an altogether irresolute character. When a plan is made, it must be carried out if at all possible. Regarding the play of White, I consider his 10th and 12th moves were very weak; he played well after that up to the 27th move, which was bad, as well as his 28th move. The rest of his play was good, probably perfect.
Again, it was bad. White's last two moves were weak because the White King does nothing here. He should have moved his Rook to Knight 3 on the 27th move. Black should have played Pawn to Knight 4 check. After missing this opportunity, White controlled the game and finished it very accurately, while Black became more helpless with each move. The game doesn't need further comments, except that my play throughout was indecisive. When a plan is made, it must be executed if at all possible. As for White's play, I think his 10th and 12th moves were very weak; he played well after that up to the 27th move, which was also poor, along with his 28th move. The rest of his play was good, possibly perfect.
29. R - Kt 3 | P - Kt 4 ch | |
30. K - B 3 | Kt - Kt 3 | |
31. P × P | R P × P | |
32. R - R 3 | R - Q 2 | |
33. K - Kt 3 ! | K - K 1 | |
34. Q R - K R 1 | B - Kt 2 | |
35. P - K 5 | Q P × P | |
36. Kt - K 4 | Kt - Q 4 | |
37. Kt (K 6) - B 5 | B - B 1 | |
38. Kt × R | B × Kt | |
39. R - R 7 | R - B 1 | |
40. R - R 1 | K - Q 1 | |
41. R - R 8 ch | B - B 1 | |
42. Kt - B 5 | Resigns. |
GAME 6. FRENCH DEFENCE
Game 6. French Defense
(Rice Memorial Tournament, 1916)
Rice Memorial Tournament, 1916
White: O. Chajes. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
White: O. Chajes. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 3 | |
2. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
3. Kt - Q B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
4. B - Kt 5 | B - Kt 5 |
Of all the variations of the French Defence I like this best, because it gives Black more chances to obtain the initiative.
Of all the versions of the French Defense, I like this one the most because it gives Black better chances to take the initiative.
5. P - K 5 |
Though I consider P × P the best move, there is much to be said in favour of this move, but not of the variation as a whole, which White adopted in this game.
Though I think P × P is the best move, there are many good points about this move, but not about the variation overall that White chose in this game.
5. ........ | P - K R 3 | |
6. B - Q 2 | B × Kt | |
7. P × B | Kt - K 5 | |
8. Q - Kt 4 | K - B 1 |
The alternative, P - K Kt 3; leaves Black's King's side very weak. White by playing P - K R 4 would force Black to play P - K R 4; and later, on White's Bishop by going to Q 3, would threaten the weakened K Kt P. By the text move Black gives up Castling, but gains time for an attack against White's centre and Queen's side. {190}
The alternative, P-K Kt 3; leaves Black's King's side very vulnerable. White can play P-K R 4 to force Black to play P-K R 4; and later, if White's Bishop goes to Q 3, it would threaten the weakened K Kt P. With this move, Black gives up the chance to Castle but gains time for an attack against White's center and Queen's side. {190}
9. B - B 1 | P - Q B 4 |
Threatening Q - R 4 and stopping thereby White's threat of B - R 3. It demonstrates that White's last move was a complete loss of time and merely weakened his position.
Threatening Q - R 4 and blocking White's threat of B - R 3. It shows that White's last move was a total waste of time and just made his position weaker.
10. B - Q 3 | Q - R 4 | |
11. Kt - K 2 | P × P | |
12. O - O | P × P | |
13. B × Kt | P × B | |
14. Q × P | Kt - B 3 |
Black has come out of the opening with a Pawn to the good. His development, however, has suffered somewhat, and there are Bishops of opposite colour, so that it cannot be said as yet, that Black has a won game; but he has certainly the best of the position, because, besides being a Pawn to the good, he threatens White's K P, which must of course be {191}defended, and this in turn will give him the opportunity to post his Knight at Q 4 via K 2. When the Black Knight is posted at Q 4, the Bishop will be developed to B 3 via Q 2, as soon as the opportunity presents itself, and it will be Black that will then have the initiative, and can consequently decide the course of the game.
Black has come out of the opening with an extra pawn. However, his development has lagged a bit, and there are bishops of opposite colors, so it can't be said that Black has a winning game just yet; but he definitely has the better position because, in addition to being a pawn up, he is threatening White's king pawn, which obviously needs to be defended. This will also give him the chance to position his knight on queen four via king two. Once the Black knight is on queen four, the bishop will be developed to bishop three via queen two as soon as the opportunity arises, and it will be Black who has the initiative, allowing him to dictate the flow of the game.
15. R - Q 1 |
To prevent Kt - K 2; which would be answered by Kt × P, or still better by B - R 3. The move, however, is strategically wrong, since by bringing his pieces to the Queen's side, White loses any chance he might have of making a determined attack on the King's side before Black is thoroughly prepared for it.
To avoid Kt - K 2; which could be addressed with Kt × P, or even better with B - R 3. However, this move is strategically flawed because by shifting his pieces to the Queen's side, White forfeits any opportunity to launch a strong attack on the King's side before Black is fully set up to defend against it.
15. ........ | P - K Kt 3 | |
16. P - B 4 | K - Kt 2 | |
17. B - K 3 |
Better would have been P - Q R 4, in order to play B - R 3. The White B would be much better posted on the open diagonal than here, where it acts purely on the defensive.
Better would have been P - Q R 4, in order to play B - R 3. The White B would be much better positioned on the open diagonal than here, where it is just playing defense.
17. ........ | Kt - K 2 | |
18. B - B 2 | Kt - Q 4 |
19. R - Q 3 | B - Q 2 | |
20. Kt - Q 4 | Q R - Q B 1 | |
21. R - Kt 3 | K - R 2 | |
22. P - K R 4 | K R - Kt 1 | |
23. P - R 5 | Q - Kt 5 |
In order to pin the Knight and be ready to come back to either K 2 or B 1. Also to prevent Q R - Kt 1. In reality nearly all these precautions are unnecessary, since White's attack amounts to nothing. Probably Black should have left aside all these considerations, and played Q - R 5 now, in order to follow it up with P - B 4, as he did later, but under less favourable circumstances.
To pin the Knight and be prepared to return to either K 2 or B 1. Also, to stop Q R - Kt 1. In truth, almost all these precautions are pointless, since White's attack leads to nothing. Black probably should have ignored all these thoughts and played Q - R 5 now to then follow up with P - B 4, as he did later, but in less favorable conditions.
24. R - R 3 |
24. ........ | P - B 4 |
25. P × P e.p. | Kt × P (B 3) | |
26. P × P ch | R × P |
27. R × P ch |
This wins the Queen.
This wins the queen.
27. ........ | K × R | |
28. Kt - B 5 ch | P × Kt | |
29. Q × Q |
The position looks most interesting. I thought it would be possible to get up such an attack against the White King as to make it impossible for him to hold out much longer, but I was wrong, unless it could have been done by playing B - B 3 first, forcing P - Kt 3 and then playing K - R 4. I followed a similar plan, but lost a very important move by playing Q R - K Kt 1; which gave White time to play R - Q 1. I am convinced, however, that B - B 3 at once was the right move. White would be forced to play P - Kt 3, and Black would reply with either K - R 4; as already indicated, which looks the best (the plan, of course, is to play R - K R 1; and follow it up with K - Kt 5; threatening mate, or some other move according to circumstances. In some cases, of course, it will be better first to play K - Kt 5), or Kt - K 5, which will at least give him a draw. There are so many possibilities in this position that it would be impossible to give them all. It will be worth the reader's time to go carefully through the lines of play indicated above.
The position looks really interesting. I thought I could launch an attack against the White King that would make it difficult for him to hold out much longer, but I was mistaken, unless I had played B-B3 first, forcing P-Kt3, and then played K-R4. I followed a similar plan but lost a crucial move by playing QR-KKt1, which gave White the chance to play R-Q1. However, I'm convinced that B-B3 right away was the correct move. White would have to play P-Kt3, and Black would respond with either K-R4, which seems like the best option (the plan, of course, is to play R-KR1 and follow it up with K-Kt5, threatening checkmate, or another move depending on the situation. In some cases, it might be better to play K-Kt5 first), or Kt-K5, which at least guarantees a draw for him. There are so many possibilities in this position that it would be impossible to cover them all. It will be worth the reader's time to carefully review the lines of play mentioned above.
29. ........ | Q R - K Kt 1 |
As stated B - B 3 was the best move.
As stated, B - B 3 was the best move.
30. P - Kt 3 | B - B 3 | |
31. R - Q 1 | K - R 4 |
The plan, of course, as explained above, is to go to Kt 5 in due time and threaten mate at K R 8, but it is now too late, the White Rook having come in {195}time to prevent the manœuvre. Instead of the text move, therefore, Black should have played Kt - K 5; which would have given him a draw at the very least. After the text moves the tables are turned. It is now White who has the upper hand, and Black who has to fight for a draw.
The plan, as mentioned earlier, is to move to Kt 5 eventually and threaten checkmate at K R 8, but it’s now too late since the White Rook has arrived {195} in time to block that strategy. Instead of the current move, Black should have played Kt - K 5; this would have secured at least a draw for him. After the current moves, the situation is reversed. Now, White has the advantage, and Black is the one who has to fight for a draw.
32. R - Q 6 | B - K 5 |
Kt - K 5 was still the right move, and probably the last chance Black had to draw against White's best play.
Kt - K 5 was still the right move, and probably Black's last chance to secure a draw against White's best play.
33. Q × B P | Kt - Q 4 | |
34. R × R | K × R |
Kt × Q; R × R, Kt × P was no better.
Kt × Q; R × R, Kt × P was no better.
35. Q - K 5 | K - B 2 | |
36. P - B 4 | R - K 1 | |
37. Q - Kt 2 | Kt - B 3 | |
38. B - Q 4 | R - K R 1 | |
39. Q - Kt 5 | R - R 8 ch | |
40. K - B 2 | P - R 3 | |
41. Q - Kt 6 | R - R 7 ch | |
42. K - K 1 | Kt - Q 2 | |
43. Q - Q 6 | B - B 3 | |
44. P - Kt 4 | P × P | |
45. P - K B 5 | R - R 8 ch | |
46. K - Q 2 | K - K 1 | |
47. P - B 6 | R - R 2 | |
48. Q - K 6 ch | K - B 1 | |
49. B - K 3 | R - B 2 | |
50. B - R 6 ch | K - Kt 1 |
Most players will be wondering, as the spectators did, why I did not resign. The reason is that while I knew the game to be lost, I was hoping for the following variation, which Chajes came very near playing: 51 Q × P ch, K - R 2; 52 Q - R 5, R × P; 53 B - Kt 5 ch, K - Kt 2; 54 B × R ch, K × B; and while White has a won game it is by no means easy. If the reader does not believe it, let him take the White pieces against a master and see what happens. My opponent, who decided to take no chances, played 51 B - Kt 7, and finally won as shown below.
Most players will be wondering, just like the spectators did, why I didn’t resign. The reason is that even though I knew the game was lost, I was holding out hope for this variation that Chajes almost played: 51 Q × P check, K - R 2; 52 Q - R 5, R × P; 53 B - Kt 5 check, K - Kt 2; 54 B × R check, K × B; and while White has a winning position, it’s definitely not easy. If the reader doesn’t believe this, try playing as White against a master and see what happens. My opponent, who decided to play it safe, moved with 51 B - Kt 7, and ultimately won as shown below.
51. B - Kt 7 | P - Kt 6 | |
52. K - K2 | P - Kt 7 | |
53. K - B 2 | Kt - B 1 | |
54. Q - Kt 4 | Kt - Q 2 | |
55. K - Kt 1 | P - R 4 | |
56. P - R 4 | B × P | |
57. Q - R 3 | R × P | |
58. B × R | Kt × B | |
59. Q × P ch | K - B 1 | |
60. Q × P |
and after a very few more moves Black resigned.
and after just a few more moves, Black resigned.
A very fine game on Chajes' part from move 25 on, for while Black, having the best of the position, missed several chances, White, on the other hand, missed none.
A really great game on Chajes' part from move 25 onward, because while Black, who had the advantage, missed several opportunities, White, on the other hand, didn't miss any.
GAME 7. RUY LOPEZ
Game 7: Ruy Lopez
(San Sebastian, 1911)
(San Sebastián, 1911)
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: A. Burn
White: J.R. Capablanca. Black: A. Burn
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - Q B 3 | |
3. B - Kt 5 | P - Q R 3 | |
4. B - R 4 | Kt - B 3 | |
5. P - Q 3 |
This is a very solid development, to which I was much addicted at the time, because of my ignorance of the multiple variations of the openings.
This was a really strong development that I was quite hooked on at the time due to my lack of knowledge about the many variations of the openings.
5. ........ | P - Q 3 | |
6. P - B 3 | B - K 2 |
In this variation there is the alternative of developing this Bishop via Kt 2, after P - K Kt 3.
In this variation, there's the option of developing this Bishop via Kt 2, after P - K Kt 3.
7. Q Kt - Q 2 | O - O | |
8. Kt - B 1 | P - Q Kt 4 | |
9. B - B 2 | P - Q 4 | |
10. Q - K 2 | P × P | |
11. P × P | B - Q B 4 |
Evidently to make room for the Queen at K 2, but I do not think the move advisable at this stage. B - K 3 is a more natural and effective move. It develops a piece and threatens B - B 5, which would have to be stopped.
Clearly, the move is intended to make space for the Queen at K 2, but I don't think it’s a good idea at this point. B - K 3 is a more logical and effective move. It develops a piece and threatens B - B 5, which would need to be blocked.
12. B - Kt 5 | B - K 3 |
Now it is not so effective, because White's Q B is out, and the Knight, in going to K 3 to defend the square Q B 4, does not block the Q B.
Now it's not as effective, because White's queen's bishop is out, and the knight, by moving to king 3 to defend the square queen's bishop 4, does not block the queen's bishop.
13. Kt - K 3 | R - K 1 | |
14. O - O | Q - K 2 |
This is bad. Black's game was already not good. He probably had no choice but to take the Knight with the Bishop before making this move.
This is bad. Black's game was already not going well. He probably had no choice but to take the Knight with the Bishop before making this move.
15. Kt - Q 5 | B × Kt | |
16. P × B | Kt - Kt 1 |
in order to bring it to Q 2, to support the other Knight and also his King's Pawn. White, however, does not allow time for this, and by taking advantage of his superior position is able to win a Pawn.
in order to bring it to Q 2, to support the other Knight and also his King's Pawn. White, however, does not allow time for this, and by taking advantage of his superior position is able to win a Pawn.
17. P - Q R 4 | P - Kt 5 |
18. P × P | B × P | |
19. B × Kt | Q × B | |
20. Q - K 4 | B - Q 3 | |
21. Q × P ch | K - B 1 |
With a Pawn more and all his pieces ready for action, while Black is still backward in development, it only remains for White to drive home his advantage before Black can come out with his pieces, in which case, by using the open K R file, Black might be able to start a strong attack against White's King. White is able by his next move to eliminate all danger.
With one Pawn ahead and all his pieces poised for action, while Black is still slow to develop, White just needs to capitalize on his advantage before Black can mobilize his pieces. If Black gets a chance, he could use the open King’s Rook file to launch a strong attack against White's King. However, White can remove all threats with his next move.
22. Kt - R 4 | Q - R 3 |
23. Q × Q | P × Q | |
24. Kt - B 5 | P - K R 4 | |
25. B - Q 1 | Kt - Q 2 | |
26. B × P | Kt - B 3 | |
27. B - K 2 | Kt × P | |
28. K R - Q 1 | Kt - B 5 | |
29. B - B 4 | K R - Q 1 | |
30. P - R 4 | P - R 4 |
Black must lose time assuring the safety of this Pawn.
Black has to spend time making sure this Pawn is safe.
31. P - Kt 3 | Kt - K 3 | |
32. B × Kt | P × B | |
33. Kt - K 3 | K R - Kt 1 | |
34. Kt - B 4 | K - K 2 |
Black fights a hopeless battle. He is two Pawns down for all practical purposes, and the Pawns he has are isolated and have to be defended by pieces.
Black is fighting a losing battle. He is essentially two Pawns down, and the Pawns he has are isolated and need to be protected by other pieces.
35. Q R - B 1 | R - R 2 |
White threatened Kt × B, followed by R - B 7 ch.
White threatened Kt x B, followed by R - B7 check.
36. R - K 1 | K - B 3 | |
37. R - K 4 | R - Kt 5 | |
38. P - Kt 4 | R - R 3 |
If R × R P; Kt × B of course would win a piece
If R × R P; Kt × B would definitely win a piece.
39. R - B 3 | B - B 4 | |
40. R - B 3 ch | K - Kt 2 | |
41. P - Kt 3 | B - Q 5 | |
42. K - Kt 2 | R - R 1 | |
{201} | 43. P - Kt 5 | R - R 3 |
44. P - R 5 | R × Kt | |
45. P × R | R - B 3 | |
46. P - Kt 6 | Resigns. |
GAME 8. CENTRE GAME
GAME 8. CENTER GAME
(Berlin 1913)
(Berlin 1913)
White: J. Mieses. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
White: J. Mieses. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. P - Q 4 | P × P | |
3. Q × P | Kt - Q B 3 | |
4. Q - K 3 | Kt - B 3 | |
5. Kt - Q B 3 | B - Kt 5 | |
6. B - Q 2 | O - O | |
7. O - O - O | R - K 1 |
In this position, instead of the text move, P - Q 3 is often played in order to develop the Q B. My idea was to exert sufficient pressure against the K P to win it, and thus gain a material advantage, which would, at least, compensate whatever slight advantage of position White might have. The plan, I think, is quite feasible, my subsequent difficulties being due to faulty execution of the plan.
In this position, instead of moving the text, P - Q 3 is often played to develop the Q B. My idea was to apply enough pressure on the K P to win it, gaining a material advantage that would at least balance out any slight positional advantage White might have. I believe the plan is entirely doable; my later struggles were due to poorly executing the plan.
8. Q - Kt 3 | Kt × P | |
9. Kt × Kt | R × Kt | |
10. B - K B 4 |
10. ........ | Q - B 3 |
White's threat to regain the Pawn was merely with the idea of gaining time to develop his pieces. Black could have played P - Q 3; opening the way for his Q B, when would have followed, 11 B - Q 3, R - K 1; 12 Kt - B 3, and White would soon start a powerful direct attack against Black's King. With the text move Black aims at taking the initiative away from White in accordance with the principles laid down in this book.
White's threat to regain the pawn was just to buy time for developing his pieces. Black could have played P–Q3, opening up space for his QB, which would have led to 11 B–Q3, R–K1; 12 Kt–B3, and White would soon begin a strong direct attack on Black's King. With the current move, Black is trying to take the initiative away from White, following the principles outlined in this book.
11. Kt - R 3 |
If B × P, P - Q 3; and White's Bishop would be completely shut off, and could only be extricated, if at all, with serious loss of position. The text move aims at quick development to keep the initiative.
If B × P, P - Q 3; and White's Bishop would be totally blocked, and could only be freed, if at all, with a significant loss of position. The current move focuses on quick development to maintain the initiative.
11. ........ | P - Q 3 |
12. B - Q 3 | Kt - Q 5 |
This complicates the game unnecessarily. R - K 1; was simple, and perfectly safe.
This complicates the game unnecessarily. R - K 1; was straightforward and completely safe.
13. B - K 3 |
13. ........ | B - Kt 5 |
This is a serious mistake. The position was most interesting, and though in appearance dangerous for Black, not so in reality. The right move would have been 13...R - Kt 5, when we would have 14 B × Kt, R × B; 15 P - Q B 3, B × P; 16 P × B, R - K Kt 5; 17 Q - K 3 (best), Q × P ch; 18 B - B 2, Q × Q; 19 P × Q, R × P, and Black has the best of the game with four Pawns for a Knight, besides the fact that all the White Pawns are isolated.
This is a serious mistake. The position was really interesting, and although it looked dangerous for Black, it wasn't in reality. The right move would have been 13...R-Kt5, which would lead to 14 B×Kt, R×B; 15 P-QB3, B×P; 16 P×B, R-KKt5; 17 Q-K3 (best), Q×P check; 18 B-B2, Q×Q; 19 P×Q, R×P, and Black would have the advantage with four Pawns for a Knight, plus all of White's Pawns are isolated.
14. Kt - Kt 5 ! | R × B |
There was nothing better.
There was nothing better.
15. Q × B ! | Kt - K 7 ch |
16. B × Kt ! | R × B | |
17. Kt - K 4 ! | R × Kt | |
18. Q × R | Q - Kt 4 ch | |
19. P - K B 4 | Q - Kt 4 | |
20. P - B 3 | B - B 4 | |
21. K R - K 1 | Q - B 3 | |
22. R - Q 5 |
Q × Q would have given White a decided advantage, enough to win with proper play. Mieses, however, feared the difficulties of an ending where, while having the exchange, he would be a Pawn minus. He preferred to keep the Queens on the board and keep up the attack. At first sight, and even after careful thought, there seems to be no objection to his plan; but in truth such is not the case. From this point the game will gradually improve in Black's favour until, with the exchange ahead, White is lost. {205}
Q × Q would have given White a clear advantage, enough to win with careful play. However, Mieses was concerned about the challenges of an ending where, even with the exchange, he would be down a Pawn. He preferred to keep the Queens on the board and maintain the offensive. At first glance, and even after deep consideration, there doesn’t seem to be any issue with his plan; but in reality, that’s not the case. From this point on, the game will gradually shift in Black's favor until, with the exchange ahead, White is lost. {205}
22. ........ | Q - Q 2 | |
23. P - B 5 | P - Q B 3 | |
24. R - Q 2 | P - Q 4 |
My plan for the moment is very simple. It will consist in bringing my Bishop around to B 3. Then I shall try to paralyse White's attack against my King by playing P - K R 3, and also prevent White from ever playing P - K Kt 5. Once my King is safe from attack I shall begin to advance my Queen's side Pawns, where there are four to three; and that advantage, coupled with the enormous attacking power of my Bishop at B 3, will at least assure me an even chance of success.
My current plan is pretty straightforward. I’m going to move my Bishop to B 3. Then, I’ll aim to stop White’s attack on my King by playing P - K R 3, while also blocking White from playing P - K Kt 5. Once my King is secure, I’ll start pushing my Queen's side Pawns, where I have four against three. That advantage, along with the huge attacking potential of my Bishop on B 3, will at least give me a fair shot at winning.
25. Q - B 3 | B - K 2 | |
26. Q R - K 2 | B - B 3 | |
27. Q - R 5 | P - K R 3 | |
28. P - K Kt 4 | K - R 2 ! |
To prevent P - K R 4, which I would answer with P - K Kt 3, winning the Queen. It can now be considered that my King is safe from attack. White will have to withdraw his Queen via R 3, and Black can use the time to begin his advance on the Queen's side.
To avoid P - K R 4, which I would respond to with P - K Kt 3, winning the Queen. Now it can be seen that my King is safe from being attacked. White will have to move his Queen back to R 3, and Black can take this time to start pushing on the Queen's side.
29. K - Kt 1 | R - Q 1 | |
30. R - Q 1 | P - B 4 |
Notice that, on assuming the defensive, White has placed his Rooks correctly from the point of view of strategy. They are both on white squares free from the possible attack of the Black Bishop.
Notice that, by playing defensively, White has positioned his Rooks strategically. They are both on white squares that are safe from any potential attacks by the Black Bishop.
31. Q - R 3 | Q - R 5 |
This gains time by attacking the Rook and holding the White Q at R 3 for the moment, on account of the K Kt P. Besides, the Queen must be in the middle of the fray now that the attack has to be brought home. White has actually more value in material, and therefore Black must utilise everything at his command in order to succeed.
This gains time by putting pressure on the Rook and keeping the White Queen at R 3 for now, because of the King Knight Pawn. Also, the Queen needs to get involved in the fight now that the attack needs to be decisive. White actually has more material value, so Black has to use everything at his disposal to succeed.
32. R (K2) - Q 2 | Q - K 5 ch | |
33. K - R 1 | P - Q Kt 4 |
threatening P - Kt 5; which would open the line of action of the Bishop and also secure a passed Pawn.
threatening P - Kt 5; which would open up the Bishop's line of action and also secure a passed Pawn.
34. Q - Kt 2 | Q - R 5 |
indirectly defending the Q P, which White cannot take on account of Q × R ch.
indirectly defending the Q P, which White cannot consider because of Q × R ch.
35. K - Kt 1 | P - Kt 5 |
The attack increases in force as it is gradually brought home directly against the King. The position now is most interesting and extremely difficult. It is doubtful if there is any valid defence against Black's best play. The variations are numerous and difficult.
The attack grows stronger as it is increasingly directed at the King. The situation is now very intriguing and quite challenging. It's questionable whether there's any valid defense against Black's strongest moves. The options are many and complex.
36. P × P | Q × P |
Black has now a passed Pawn, and his Bishop exerts great pressure. White cannot very well play now 37 R × P because of R × R; 38 R × R, B × P; and White could not take the Bishop because Q - K 5 ch would win the Rook, leaving Black a clear passed Pawn ahead.
Black now has a passed pawn, and his bishop is applying a lot of pressure. White can't really play 37 R × P because of R × R; then 38 R × R, B × P; and White wouldn't be able to take the bishop because Q - K 5 check would win the rook, leaving Black with a clear passed pawn advantage.
37. P - Q R 3 | Q - R 5 ! | |
38. R × P | R - Q Kt 1 | |
39. R (Q 1) - Q 2 | P - B 5 | |
40. Q - Kt 3 | R - Kt 6 | |
41. Q - Q 6 |
41. ........ | P - B 6 |
B × P would also win, which shows that White's game is altogether gone. In these cases, however, it is not the prettiest move that should be played, but the most effective one, the move that will make your opponent resign soonest.
B × P would also win, which shows that White's game is completely lost. In these situations, though, it’s not about playing the most beautiful move, but rather the most effective one—the move that will make your opponent resign the quickest.
42. R - Q B 2 | P × P | |
43. R - Q 3 | Q - K 5 ! | |
44. R - Q 1 | R - Q B 6 | |
Resigns. |
Of course White must play Q - Q 2, and Black then plays R × P.
Of course, White has to play Q-Q2, and then Black plays R×P.
GAME 9. QUEEN'S GAMBIT DECLINED
Game 9. Queen's Gambit Declined
(Berlin, 1913)
(Berlin, 1913)
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: R. Teichmann.
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: R. Teichmann.
1. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
3. P - B 4 | P - K 3 | |
4. B - Kt 5 | B - K 2 | |
5. Kt - B 3 | Q Kt - Q 2 | |
6. P - K 3 | O - O | |
7. R - B 1 | P - Q Kt 3 | |
8. P × P | P × P | |
9. B - Kt 5 |
An invention of my own, I believe. I played it on the spur of the moment simply to change the normal course of the game. Generally the Bishop goes to Q 3, or to R 6, after Q - R 4. The text move is in the nature of an ordinary developing move, and as it violates no principle it cannot be bad.
An invention of my own, I think. I played it on a whim just to shake up the usual flow of the game. Normally, the Bishop goes to Q 3, or to R 6, after Q - R 4. The move I made is a typical developing move, and since it doesn't break any principles, it can't be bad.
9. ........ | B - Kt 2 | |
10. O - O | P - Q R 3 | |
11. B - R 4 | R - B 1 | |
12. Q - K 2 | P - B 4 | |
13. P × P | Kt × P |
14. K R - Q 1 | Kt × B |
The alternative would have been 14...P - Kt 4; 15 B - B 2, P - Kt 5; 16 Kt - Q R 4, Kt (B 4) - K 5.
The alternative would have been 14...P - Kt 4; 15 B - B 2, P - Kt 5; 16 Kt - Q R 4, Kt (B 4) - K 5.
15. Kt × Kt | P - Kt 4 | |
16. R × R | Q × R | |
17. Kt - B 3 | Q - B 5 |
Black aims at the exchange of Queens in order to remain with two Bishops for the ending, but in this position such a course is a mistake, because the Bishop at Kt 2 is inactive and cannot come into the game by any means, unless Black gives up the isolated Queen's Pawn which the Bishop must defend.
Black plans to trade Queens to keep two Bishops for the endgame, but in this situation, that's a mistake because the Bishop on Knight 2 isn't working and can't get into play unless Black sacrifices the isolated Queen's Pawn that the Bishop has to defend.
18. Kt - Q 4 |
Not, of course, R - Q 4, because of Q × Q; Kt × Q, R - B 1; and there would be no good way to prevent R - B 7.
Not, of course, R - Q 4, because of Q × Q; Kt × Q, R - B 1; and there would be no good way to prevent R - B 7.
18. ........ | Q × Q | |
19. Kt (B 3) × Q ! |
Notice the co-ordination of the Knights' moves. They are manœuvred chain-like, so to speak, in order to maintain one of them, either at Q 4 or ready to go there. Now White threatens to take the open file, and therefore forces Black's next move.
Notice how the Knights coordinate their moves. They are maneuvered in a chain-like fashion to keep one of them either at Q 4 or ready to move there. Now White threatens to take the open file, which forces Black's next move.
19. ........ | R - B 1 |
The student should examine this position carefully. There seems to be no particular danger, yet, as White will demonstrate, Black may be said to be lost. If the game is not altogether lost, the defence is at least of the most difficult kind; indeed, I must confess that I can see no adequate defence against White's next move.
The student should look at this position closely. There doesn't seem to be any obvious danger, but as White will show, Black is practically lost. Even if the game isn't completely over, the defense is incredibly tough; honestly, I have to admit that I can't see a solid defense against White's next move.
20. Kt - B 5 ! | K - B 1 |
If 20...B - Q 1; 21 Kt - Q 6, R - B 2; 22 Kt × B, R × Kt; 23 B × Kt, B × B; 24 R × P, R - B 2; 25 R - Q 2, and White is a Pawn ahead. If 20...B moves anywhere else, then B × Kt, doubling the K B P and isolating all of Black's King's side Pawns.
If 20...B - Q 1; 21 Kt - Q 6, R - B 2; 22 Kt × B, R × Kt; 23 B × Kt, B × B; 24 R × P, R - B 2; 25 R - Q 2, and White is a pawn ahead. If 20...B moves to any other position, then B × Kt, doubling the K B P and isolating all of Black's King side pawns.
21. Kt × B | K × Kt | |
22. Kt - Q 4 | P - Kt 3 |
23. P - B 3 ! |
23. ........ | P - R 3 |
Black could do nothing else except mark time with his Rook along the open file, since as soon as he moved away White would take it. White, on the other hand, threatens to march up with his King to K 5 via K B 2, K Kt 3, K B 4, after having, of course, prepared the way. Hence, Black's best chance was to give up a Pawn, as in the text, in order to free his Knight.
Black could do nothing but keep his Rook moving along the open file because if he moved away, White would just take it. White, on the other hand, is threatening to advance his King to K 5 via K B 2, K Kt 3, K B 4, after setting everything up, of course. So, Black's best option was to sacrifice a Pawn, as mentioned, to free his Knight.
24. B × P | Kt - Q 2 | |
25. P - K R 4 | Kt - B 4 | |
26. B - B 4 | Kt - K 3 |
Black exchanges Knights to remain with Bishops of {213}opposite colours, which gives him the best chance to draw.
Black trades Knights to keep the Bishops of opposite colors, which gives him the best chance to draw.
27. Kt × Kt | K × Kt |
27...P × Kt would be worse, as White would then be able to post his Bishop at K 5.
27...P × Kt would be worse, since White would then be able to place his Bishop at K 5.
28. R - Q 2 | R - K R 1 |
Black wants to force B - Kt 3. P - K Kt 3 would be bad, on account of P - Q 5; which would get the Black Bishop into the game, even though White could answer P - K 4. The text move is, however, weak, as will soon be seen. His best chance was to play P - Kt 5; and follow it up with P - R 4 and B - R 3. White meanwhile could play P - Kt 4 and R 5, obtaining a passed Pawn, which, with proper play, should win.
Black wants to force B - Kt 3. P - K Kt 3 would be a bad move because of P - Q 5; that would bring the Black Bishop into play, even though White could respond with P - K 4. However, the current move is weak, as will soon become clear. His best move would have been P - Kt 5, followed by P - R 4 and B - R 3. Meanwhile, White could play P - Kt 4 and R 5, creating a passed Pawn, which, with good play, should lead to a win.
29. R - Q B 2 ! | R - Q B 1 | |
30. R × R | B × R |
31. K - B 2 |
31. ........ | P - Q 5 |
Practically forced. Otherwise the White King would march up to Q 4 and then to B 5 and win Black's Queen's side Pawns. If Black attempted to stop this by putting his King at Q B 3 then the White King would enter through K 5 into Black's King's side and win just as easily.
Practically forced. Otherwise, the White King would move to Q4 and then to B5 to capture Black's Queen's side Pawns. If Black tried to prevent this by placing his King at QB3, the White King would enter through K5 into Black's King's side and win just as easily.
32. P × P | K - Q 4 | |
33. K - K 3 | B - K 3 | |
34. K - Q 3 | K - B 3 | |
35. P - Q R 3 | B - B 5 ch | |
36. K - K 3 | B - K 3 | |
37. B - R 6 |
37. ........ | K - Q 4 | |
38. B - Kt 7 | Resigns. |
The student ought to have realised by this time the enormous importance of playing well every kind of ending. In this game again, practically from the opening, White aimed at nothing but the isolation of Black's Q P. Once he obtained that, he tried for and obtained, fortunately, another advantage of position elsewhere which translated itself into the material advantage of a Pawn. Then by accurate playing in the ending he gradually forced home his advantage. This ending has the merit of having been played against one of the finest players in the world.
The student should have understood by now the huge importance of mastering every type of ending. In this game, from nearly the beginning, White focused solely on isolating Black's Q P. Once that was achieved, he managed to gain, quite fortunately, another positional advantage elsewhere that turned into the material advantage of a Pawn. Then, by playing accurately in the ending, he gradually solidified his advantage. This ending is notable for being played against one of the best players in the world.
GAME 10. PETROFF DEFENCE
Game 10. Petrov Defense
(St. Petersburg, 1914)
(St. Petersburg, 1914)
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: F. J. Marshall
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: F. J. Marshall
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
3. Kt × P | P - Q 3 | |
4. Kt - K B 3 | Kt × P | |
5. Q - K 2 | Q - K 2 | |
6. P - Q 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
7. B - Kt 5 |
Played by Morphy, and a very fine move. The point is that should Black exchange Queens he will be a move behind in development and consequently will get a cramped game if White plays accurately.
Played by Morphy, and a very nice move. The point is that if Black exchanges Queens, he will be one move behind in development and will end up with a cramped game if White plays accurately.
7. ........ | B - K 3 |
Marshall thought at the time that this was the best move and consequently played it in preference to Q × Q ch.
Marshall thought at the time that this was the best move and therefore played it instead of Q × Q ch.
8. Kt - B 3 | P - K R 3 | |
9. B × Kt | Q × B | |
10. P - Q 4 | B - K 2 | |
11. Q - Kt 5 ch | Kt - Q 2 | |
12. B - Q 3 ! |
It is now time to examine the result of the opening. On White's side we find the minor pieces well posted and the Queen out in a somewhat odd place, it is true, but safe from attack and actually attacking a Pawn. {217}White is also ready to Castle. White's position is evidently free from danger and his pieces can easily manœuvre.
It’s now time to look at the outcome of the opening. On White’s side, the minor pieces are positioned well, and the Queen is in a somewhat unusual spot—it's true—but it’s safe from attack and actually attacking a Pawn. {217}White is also prepared to Castle. White’s position is clearly safe, and his pieces can easily maneuver.
On Black's side the first thing we notice is that he has retained both his Bishops, unquestionably an advantage; but on the other hand we find his pieces bunched together too much, and the Queen in danger of being attacked without having any good square to go to. The Bishop at K 2 has no freedom and it blocks the Queen, which, in its turn, blocks the Bishop. Besides, Black cannot Castle on the King's side because Q × P, R - Kt 1; Q - K 4 threatening mate, wins a Pawn. Nor can he Castle on the Queen's side because Q - R 5 would put Black's game in imminent danger, since he cannot play P - R 3 because of B × P; nor can he play K - Kt 1 because of Kt - Kt 5. Consequently we must conclude that the opening is all in White's favour.
On Black's side, the first thing we notice is that he has kept both his Bishops, which is definitely an advantage. However, his pieces are too clustered together, and the Queen is at risk of being attacked without any good options for escape. The Bishop on K2 lacks mobility and blocks the Queen, which in turn blocks the Bishop. Additionally, Black can't Castle on the King's side because Q x P, R - Kt1; Q - K4, threatening checkmate, allows White to win a Pawn. He also can't Castle on the Queen's side because Q - R5 would put Black's position in serious jeopardy, as he can't play P - R3 due to B x P; nor can he move K - Kt1 because of Kt - Kt5. Therefore, we have to conclude that the opening is clearly in White's favor.
12. ........ | P - Kt 4 |
To make room for his Queen, threatening also P - Kt 5.
To make space for his Queen, also threatening P-Kt5.
13. P - K R 3 | O - O |
14. Q × P | Q R - Kt 1 | |
15. Q - K 4 | Q - Kt 2 | |
16. P - Q Kt 3 | P - Q B 4 |
In order to break up White's centre and bring his Knight to B 4 and thus lay the foundation for a violent attack against White's King. The plan, however, fails, as it always must in such cases, because Black's development is backward, and consequently his pieces are not properly placed.
To disrupt White's center and move his Knight to B4 to set the stage for a fierce attack on White's King. However, the plan fails, as it always does in these situations, because Black's development lags, and as a result, his pieces aren't positioned correctly.
17. O - O | P × P | |
18. Kt - Q 5 ! |
A simple move, which destroys Black's plan utterly. Black will now have no concerted action of his pieces, and, as his Pawns are all weak, he will sooner or later lose them.
A straightforward move that completely ruins Black's strategy. Black will now have no coordinated efforts with his pieces, and since all his Pawns are weak, he will eventually lose them.
18. ........ | B - Q 1 | |
19. B - B 4 | Kt - B 4 | |
20. Q × P | Q × Q |
The fact that he has to exchange Queens when he is a Pawn behind shows that Black's game is lost.
The fact that he has to trade Queens while being a Pawn down shows that Black's game is over.
21. Kt × Q | B × Kt | |
22. B × B | B - B 3 | |
23. Q R - Q 1 | B × Kt |
The Knight was too threatening. But now the ending brought about is one in which the Bishop is stronger than the Knight; which makes Black's plight a desperate one. The game has no further interest, and it is only because of its value as a study of this variation of the Petroff that I have given it. Black was able to fight it out until the sixtieth move on account of some poor play on White's part. The rest of the moves are given merely as a matter of form.
The Knight was too intimidating. But now the outcome has turned out to be one where the Bishop is more powerful than the Knight, putting Black in a really tough spot. The game doesn't hold any more interest, and I’ve included it only because it serves as a study of this variation of the Petroff. Black managed to hold on until the sixtieth move due to some bad moves by White. The remaining moves are included just for the sake of completion.
GAME 11. RUY LOPEZ
GAME 11. RUY LOPEZ
(St. Petersburg, 1914)
(St. Petersburg, 1914)
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: D. Janowski.
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: D. Janowski.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - Q B 3 | |
3. B - Kt 5 | P - Q R 3 | |
4. B × Kt | Q P × B | |
5. Kt - B 3 |
I played this move after having discussed it with Alechin on several occasions. Alechin considered it, at the time, superior to P - Q 4, which is generally played. He played it himself later on in the Tournament, in one of his games against Dr. E. Lasker, and obtained the superior game, which he only lost through a blunder.
I made this move after discussing it with Alechin several times. He thought it was better than P - Q 4, which is usually played. He ended up using it himself later in the tournament, in one of his games against Dr. E. Lasker, and had a stronger position, but he lost because of a mistake.
5. ........ | B - Q B 4 |
P - B 3 is probably the best move in this position. I do not like the text move.
P - B 3 is probably the best move in this position. I’m not a fan of the text move.
6. P - Q 3 | B - K Kt 5 | |
7. B - K 3 | B × B |
This opens the K B file for White, and also reinforces his centre, but Black naturally did not want to make a second move with this Bishop.
This opens the K B file for White and strengthens his center, but Black obviously didn’t want to move this Bishop again.
8. P × B | Q - K 2 | |
9. O - O | O - O - O |
10. Q - K 1 | Kt - R 3 |
The problem for White now is to advance his Q Kt P to Kt 5 as fast as he can. If he plays P - Q Kt 4 at once, Black simply takes it. If he plays first P - Q R 3 and then P - Q Kt 4, he will still have to protect his Q Kt P before he can go on and play P - Q R 4 and P - Kt 5. As a matter of fact White played a rather unusual move, but one which, under the circumstances, was the best, since after it he could at once play P - Q Kt 4 and then P - Q R 4 and P - Kt 5.
The problem for White now is to push his Q Kt P to Kt 5 as quickly as possible. If he plays P - Q Kt 4 right away, Black will just capture it. If he first plays P - Q R 3 and then P - Q Kt 4, he will still need to protect his Q Kt P before he can continue with P - Q R 4 and P - Kt 5. In fact, White made a rather unusual move, but one that was the best choice given the circumstances, because after that, he could immediately play P - Q Kt 4 followed by P - Q R 4 and P - Kt 5.
11. R - Kt 1 ! | P - B 3 | |
12. P - Kt 4 | Kt - B 2 | |
13. P - Q R 4 | B × Kt |
14. R × B |
Taking with the Pawn would have opened a possibility for a counter attack.
Taking with the pawn would have created an opportunity for a counterattack.
14. ........ | P - Q Kt 3 |
He is forced to this in order to avoid the breaking up of his Queen's side Pawns. The only alternative would have been P - Q Kt 4; which on the face of it looks bad.
He has to do this to keep his Queen's side Pawns from breaking apart. The only other choice would have been P - Q Kt 4; which seems bad at first glance.
15. P - Kt 5 | B P × P | |
16. P × P | P - Q R 4 | |
17. Kt - Q 5 | Q - B 4 | |
18. P - B 4 |
The White Knight is now a tower of strength. Behind it White will be able to prepare an attack, which will begin with P - Q 4, to drive away the Black Queen and thus leave himself free to play P - B 5. There is only one thing to take care of and that {224}is to prevent Black from sacrificing the Rook for the Knight and a Pawn.
18. ........ | Kt - Kt 4 | |
19. R - B 2 | Kt - K 3 | |
20. Q - B 3 | R - Q 2 |
Had White on his 19th move played K R - B 1 instead of R - B 2, Black could have played now instead of the text move, R × Kt; K P × R, Q × P ch; followed by Kt - B 4 with a winning game.
Had White on his 19th move played K R - B 1 instead of R - B 2, Black could have played now instead of the text move, R × Kt; K P × R, Q × P ch; followed by Kt - B 4 with a winning game.
21. R - Q 1 | K - Kt 2 |
It would have been better for Black to play K - Q 1. The text move loses very rapidly.
It would have been better for Black to play K – Q 1. The move in the text loses very quickly.
22. P - Q 4 | Q - Q 3 | |
23. R - B 2 | P × P | |
24. P × P | Kt - B 5 | |
25. P - B 5 | Kt × Kt | |
26. P × Kt | Q × Q P | |
27. P - B 6 ch | K - Kt 1 | |
28. P × R | Q × P (Q 2) | |
29. P - Q 5 | R - K 1 | |
30. P - Q 6 | P × P | |
31. Q - B 6 | Resigns. |
GAME 12. FRENCH DEFENCE
GAME 12. FRENCH DEFENSE
(New York, 1918)
(New York, 1918)
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: O. Chajes.
White: J. R. Capablanca. Black: O. Chajes.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 3 | |
2. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
3. Kt - Q B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
4. B - Q 3 |
Not the most favoured move, but a perfectly natural developing one, and consequently it cannot be bad.
Not the most preferred move, but a completely natural one that develops the game, so it can't be a bad choice.
4 ........ | P × P |
P - Q B 4 is generally played in this case instead of the text move.
P - Q B 4 is typically played in this case instead of the text move.
5. Kt × P | Q Kt - Q 2 | |
6. Kt × Kt ch | Kt × Kt | |
7. Kt - B 3 | B - K 2 |
8. Q - K 2 |
This is played to prevent P - Q Kt 3, followed by B - Kt 2, which is the general form of development for Black in this variation. If Black now plays 8...P - Q Kt 3; 9. B - Kt 5 ch, B - Q 2; 10. Kt - K 5 and White obtains a considerable advantage in position.
This move is made to stop P - Q Kt 3, followed by B - Kt 2, which is the typical way Black develops in this variation. If Black then plays 8...P - Q Kt 3; 9. B - Kt 5 check, B - Q 2; 10. Kt - K 5, White gains a significant positional advantage.
8. ........ | O - O | |
9. B - K Kt 5 | P - K R 3 |
Of course Black could not play P - Q Kt 3 because of B × Kt, followed by Q - K 4.
Of course, Black couldn't play P - Q Kt 3 because of B × Kt, followed by Q - K 4.
10. B × Kt | B × B | |
11. Q - K 4 | P - K Kt 3 |
This weakens Black's King's side. R - K 1 was the right move.
This weakens Black's King side. R-K1 was the right move.
12. P - K R 4 |
12. ........ | P - K 4 |
This is merely giving up a Pawn in order to come out quickly with his Q B. But as he does not obtain {227}any compensation for his Pawn, the move is bad. He should have played Q - Q 4 and tried to fight the game out that way. It might have continued thus: 13. Q - B 4, B - Kt 2; 14. Q × B P, B × P; 15. Kt × B, Q × Kt; 16. O - O - O with considerable advantage of position for White. The text move might be considered a mild form of suicide.
This is just giving up a Pawn to quickly get his Q B out. But since he doesn't get any compensation for his Pawn, the move is bad. He should have played Q - Q 4 and tried to fight the game out that way. It could have continued like this: 13. Q - B 4, B - Kt 2; 14. Q × B P, B × P; 15. Kt × B, Q × Kt; 16. O - O - O with a significant advantage in position for White. The move in the text might be seen as a mild form of suicide.
13. P × P | B - B 4 | |
14. Q - K B 4 | B × B | |
15. O - O - O | B - Kt 2 | |
16. R × B | Q - K 2 | |
17. Q - B 4 |
In order to keep the Black Queen from coming into the game.
In order to prevent the Black Queen from entering the game.
17. ........ | Q R - Q 1 | |
18. K R - Q 1 |
A better plan would have been to play R - K 1, threatening P - K 6.
A better plan would have been to play R-K1, threatening P-K6.
18. ........ | R × R | |
19. R × R | R - K 1 | |
20. P - B 3 | P - Q B 3 |
Of course if B × P; Kt × B, Q × Kt; R - K 3. Black with a Pawn minus fights very hard.
Of course, if B × P; Kt × B, Q × Kt; R - K 3. Black, with one fewer Pawn, fights very hard.
21. R - K 3 |
21. ........ | P - Q B 4 | |
22. K - B 2 | P - Kt 3 | |
23. P - R 4 |
White's plan now is to fix the Queen's side in order to be able to manœuvre freely on the other side, where he has the advantage of material.
White's plan now is to secure the Queen's side to be able to maneuver freely on the other side, where he has the advantage in material.
23. ........ | Q - Q 2 | |
24. R - Q 3 | Q - B 1 | |
25. Q - K 4 | Q - K 3 | |
26. R - Q 5 | K - B 1 | |
27. P - B 4 | K - Kt 1 |
28. P - Q Kt 3 | K - B 1 | |
29. K - Q 3 | K - Kt 1 | |
30. R - Q 6 | Q - B 1 | |
31. R - Q 5 | Q - K 3 | |
32. P - K Kt 4 | K - B 1 | |
33. Q - B 4 | K - Kt 1 | |
34. Q - K 4 | K - B 1 |
Black persists in waiting for developments. He sees that if P - K R 5, P × P; P × P, the Queen goes to R 6, and White will have to face serious difficulties. In this situation White decides that the only course is to bring his King to K Kt 3, so as to defend the squares K R 3 and K Kt 4, where the Black Queen might otherwise become a source of annoyance.
Black continues to wait for developments. He notices that if P - K R 5, P × P; P × P, the Queen moves to R 6, and White will encounter serious challenges. In this scenario, White concludes that the only option is to move his King to K Kt 3 to protect the squares K R 3 and K Kt 4, where the Black Queen could otherwise become problematic.
35. K - K 2 | K - Kt 1 | |
36. K - B 1 | K - B 1 | |
37. K - Kt 2 | K - Kt 1 | |
38. K - Kt 3 | K - B 1 |
Now that he has completed his march with the King, White is ready to advance.
Now that he has finished his march with the King, White is ready to move forward.
39. P - K R 5 | P × P |
39...P - K Kt 4 would be answered by Q - B 5, with a winning game.
39...P - K Kt 4 would be answered by Q - B 5, with a winning game.
40. P × P | Q - K 2 |
Against K - Kt 1; White would play Q - Kt 4, practically forcing the exchange of Queens, after which White would have little trouble in winning the ending, since Black's Bishop could not do much damage in the resulting position.
Against K - Kt 1; White would play Q - Kt 4, almost forcing the exchange of Queens, after which White wouldn't have much difficulty winning the endgame, since Black's Bishop wouldn't be able to do much in the resulting position.
41. Q - B 5 | K - Kt 1 |
Black overlooks the force of 42 R - Q 7. His best defence was R - Q 1; against which White could either advance the King or play Kt - R 4, threatening Kt - Kt 6 ch.
Black misses the power of 42 R - Q 7. His best defense was R - Q 1; against which White could either move the King forward or play Kt - R 4, threatening Kt - Kt 6 ch.
42. R - Q7 | B × P ch |
This loses a piece, but Black's position was altogether hopeless.
This loses a piece, but Black’s position was completely hopeless.
43. K - Kt 4 | Q - B 3 | |
44. Kt × B | Q - Kt 2 ch | |
45. K - B 4 | Resigns. |
The interest of this game centres mainly on the opening and on the march of the White King during the final stage of the game. It is an instance of the King becoming a fighting piece, even while the Queens are still on the board.
The main focus of this game is on the opening and the movement of the White King in the final stage. It's a case of the King becoming an active piece in battle, even while the Queens are still on the board.
GAME 13. RUY LOPEZ
GAME 13. RUY LOPEZ
(New York, 1918)
(New York, 1918)
White: J. S. Morrison. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
White: J. S. Morrison. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - K 4 | P - K 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - Q B 3 | |
3. B - Kt 5 | P - Q 3 | |
4. Kt - B 3 | B - Q 2 | |
5. P - Q 4 | P × P | |
6. Kt × P | P - K Kt 3 |
In this form of defence of the Ruy Lopez the development of the K B via Kt 2 is, I think, of great importance. The Bishop at Kt 2 exerts great pressure along the long diagonal. At the same time the position of the Bishop and Pawns in front of the King, once it is Castled, is one of great defensive strength. Therefore, in this form of development, the Bishop, {232}we might say, exerts its maximum strength (Compare this note with the one in the Capablanca-Burn game at San Sebastian, page 197.)
In this variation of the Ruy Lopez defense, I believe developing the King’s Bishop to Knight 2 is very important. The Bishop on Knight 2 applies significant pressure along the long diagonal. Additionally, the position of the Bishop and the Pawns in front of the King, once it has been castled, provides strong defensive capability. Thus, in this kind of setup, we can say that the Bishop exerts its full strength {232}(See this note in the Capablanca-Burn game at San Sebastian, page 197.)
7. Kt - B 3 | B - Kt 2 | |
8. B - Kt 5 | Kt - B 3 |
Of course not K Kt - K 2; because of Kt - Q 5. The alternative would have been P - B 3; to be followed by K Kt - K 2; but in this position it is preferable to have the Kt at K B 3.
Of course not K Kt - K 2; because of Kt - Q 5. The alternative would have been P - B 3; to be followed by K Kt - K 2; but in this position it's better to have the Kt at K B 3.
9. Q - Q 2 | P - K R 3 | |
10. B - K R 4 |
An error of judgment. White wants to keep the Knight pinned, but it was more important to prevent Black from Castling immediately. B - K B 4 would have done this.
An error of judgment. White wants to keep the Knight pinned, but it was more important to prevent Black from castling right away. B – KB 4 would have accomplished this.
10. ........ | O - O | |
11. O - O - O |
Bold play, but again faulty judgment, unless he intended to play to win or lose, throwing safety to the winds. The Black Bishop at Kt 2 becomes a very powerful attacking piece. The strategical disposition of the Black pieces is now far superior to White's, therefore it will be Black who will take the offensive.
Bold move, but once again poor judgment, unless he meant to play to win or lose, disregarding safety. The Black Bishop on Kt 2 is now a very strong attacking piece. The strategic setup of the Black pieces is now much better than White's, so it will be Black who takes the offensive.
11. ........ | R - K 1 | |
12. K R - K 1 |
White wanted to keep his Q R on the open file, and consequently brings over his other Rook to the centre to defend his K P, which Black threatened to win by P - K Kt 4, followed by Kt × P.
White wanted to keep his Q R on the open file, so he brings his other Rook to the center to defend his K P, which Black threatened to capture with P - K Kt 4, followed by Kt × P.
12. ........ | P - Kt 4 ! |
Now that the K R is in the centre, Black can safely advance, since, in order to attack on the King's side, White would have to shift his Rooks, which he cannot do so long as Black keeps up the pressure in the centre.
Now that the K R is in the center, Black can safely move forward, because to attack on the King's side, White would need to reposition his Rooks, which he can't do as long as Black maintains pressure in the center.
13. B - Kt 3 | Kt - K R 4 |
Uncovering the Bishop, which now acts along the long diagonal, and at the same time preventing P - K 5, which would be answered by Kt × B; P × Kt, Kt × P; etc., winning a Pawn.
Uncovering the bishop, which now moves along the long diagonal, while also stopping P-K5, that would be countered by Kt x B; P x Kt, Kt x P; and so on, winning a pawn.
14. Kt - Q 5 | P - R 3 |
15. B - Q 3 | B - K 3 |
Preparing the onslaught. Black's pieces begin to bear against the King's position.
Preparing for the attack. Black's pieces start to pressure the King's position.
16. P - B 3 |
With the last move White not only blocks the action of Black's K B, but he also aims at placing his Bishop at Q Kt 1 and his Queen at Q B 2, and then advancing his K P, to check at K R 7.
With the last move, White not only stops Black's King Bishop from acting, but also plans to position his Bishop at Queen Knight 1 and his Queen at Queen Bishop 2, and then push his King Pawn forward to check at King Rook 7.
16. ........ | P - B 4 ! |
Initiating an attack to which there is no reply, and which has for its ultimate object either the winning of the White Q B or cutting it off from the game. (Compare this game with the Winter-Capablanca game at Hastings.)
Initiating an attack that has no response, aimed ultimately at either capturing the White Queen’s Bishop or eliminating it from the game. (Compare this game with the Winter-Capablanca game at Hastings.)
17. P - K R 4 | P - B 5 |
18. P × P ! | P × P ! |
Taking the Bishop would be dangerous, if not actually bad, while the text move accomplishes Black's object, which is to put the Bishop out of action.
Capturing the Bishop would be risky, if not outright harmful, while the text move successfully achieves Black's goal, which is to neutralize the Bishop.
19. R - R 1 | B - B 2 | |
20. K - Kt 1 |
This move unquestionably loses time. Since he would have to retire his Bishop to R 2 sooner or later, he might have done it immediately. It is doubtful, however, if at this stage of the game it would be possible for White to save the game.
This move definitely wastes time. Since he would have to move his Bishop to R2 sooner or later, he might as well have done it right away. However, it's questionable whether White can save the game at this point.
20. ........ | Kt - K 4 | |
21. Kt × Kt | R × Kt |
It was difficult to decide which way to retake. I {236}took with the Rook in order to have it prepared for a possible attack against the King.
It was hard to decide which way to go back. I took the Rook to get it ready for a possible attack on the King.
22. B - R 2 | Kt - B 3 |
Now that the White Bishop has been driven back, Black wants to get rid of White's strongly posted Knight at Q 5, which blocks the attack of the Bishop at B 2. It may be said that the Knight at Q 5 is the key to White's defence.
Now that the White Bishop has been pushed back, Black aims to eliminate White's strongly positioned Knight at Q5, which is blocking the attack of the Bishop at B2. It's fair to say that the Knight at Q5 is crucial to White's defense.
23. P - Kt 3 |
White strives not only to have play for his Bishop, but also he wants to break up Black's Pawns in order to counter-attack. The alternative would have been 23 Kt × Kt ch, Q × Kt; and Black would be threatening R - R 4, and also Q - K 3. The student should notice that Black's drawback in all this is the fact that he is playing minus the services of his Q R. It is this fact that makes it possible for White to hold out longer. {237}
White not only aims to create opportunities for his Bishop, but he also wants to disrupt Black's Pawns to launch a counter-attack. The alternative would have been 23 Kt × Kt ch, Q × Kt; and then Black would be threatening R - R 4, as well as Q - K 3. The student should note that Black's issue here is that he's playing without the support of his Q R. This situation allows White to endure longer. {237}
23. ........ | Kt × P | |
24. B × Kt | R × B | |
25. P × P | P - B 3 |
26. Kt - K 3 |
Kt - Kt 4 was the alternative, but in any event White could not resist the attack. I leave it to the reader to work this out for himself, as the variations are so numerous that they would take up too much space.
Kt - Kt 4 was the alternative, but in any case, White couldn’t withstand the attack. I’ll let the reader figure this out for themselves, as the variations are so many that they would take up too much space.
26. ........ | Q - R 4 | |
27. P - B 4 | Q × Q | |
28. R × Q | P × P | |
29. Kt - Kt 4 | B - Kt 3 |
This forces the King to the corner, where he will be in a mating net.
This forces the King into a corner, where he'll be trapped in a mating setup.
30. K - R 1 | Q R - K 1 |
Now at last the Q R enters into the game and soon the battle is over.
Now at last the Q R joins the game, and before long, the battle is over.
31. P - R 3 |
31. ........ | R - K 8 ch | |
32. R × R | R × R ch | |
33. K - R 2 | B - B 2 | |
34. K - Kt 3 | P - Q 4 |
the quickest way to finish the game.
the fastest way to complete the game.
35. B × P | P × P ch | |
36. K - Kt 4 | P - B 6 | |
37. P × P | R - K 5 ch | |
38. P - B 4 | R × P ch | |
39. K - R 5 | R × B | |
40. R - Q 8 ch | K - R 2 | |
41. R - Q 7 | B - K 3 | |
Resigns. |
A very lively game.
An exciting game.
GAME 14. QUEEN'S GAMBIT DECLINED
Game 14. Queen's Gambit Declined
(New York, 1918)
(New York, 1918)
White: F. J. Marshall. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
White: F. J. Marshall. Black: J. R. Capablanca.
1. P - Q 4 | P - Q 4 | |
2. Kt - K B 3 | Kt - K B 3 | |
3. P - B 4 | P - K 3 | |
4. Kt - B 3 | Q Kt - Q 2 | |
5. B - Kt 5 | B - K 2 | |
6. P - K 3 | O - O | |
7. R - B 1 | P - B 3 |
This is one of the oldest systems of defence against the Queen's Gambit. I had played it before in this Tournament against Kostic, and no doubt Marshall expected it. At times I change my defences, {239}or rather systems of defence; on the other hand, during a Tournament, if one of them has given me good results, I generally play it all the time.
This is one of the oldest defenses against the Queen's Gambit. I had used it before in this tournament against Kostic, and Marshall probably anticipated it. Sometimes I vary my defenses, {239} or rather my defensive strategies; however, during a tournament, if one of them has worked well for me, I usually stick with it.
8. Q - B 2 | P × P | |
9. B × P | Kt - Q 4 | |
10. B × B | Q × B | |
11. O - O | Kt × Kt | |
12. Q × Kt | P - Q Kt 3 |
This is the key to this system of defence. Having simplified the game considerably by a series of exchanges, Black will now develop his Q B along the long diagonal without having created any apparent weakness. The proper development of the Q B is Black's greatest problem in the Queen's Gambit.
This is the key to this defense system. Black has made the game much simpler through a series of exchanges and will now develop their QB along the long diagonal without creating any obvious weaknesses. Properly developing the QB is Black's biggest challenge in the Queen's Gambit.
13. P - K 4 | B - Kt 2 | |
14. K R - K 1 | K R - Q 1 |
The developing stage can now be said to be complete on both sides. The opening is over and the middle-game begins. White, as is generally the case, has {240}obtained the centre. Black, on the other hand, is entrenched in his first three ranks, and if given time will post his Q R at Q B 1 and his Knight at K B 3, and finally play P - Q B 4, in order to break up White's centre and give full action to the Black Bishop posted at Q Kt 2. In this game White attempts to anticipate that plan by initiating an advance on the centre, which, when carefully analysed, is truly an attack against Black's K P.
The development phase is now complete on both sides. The opening is finished, and the middle game begins. White, as is usually the case, has taken control of the center. Meanwhile, Black is secured in his first three ranks, and if given time, will move his Queen's Rook to Queen's Bishop one and his Knight to King's Bishop three, and eventually play a pawn to Queen's Bishop four to disrupt White's center and activate the Black Bishop on Queen's Knight two. In this game, White tries to counter that plan by pushing ahead in the center, which, upon closer inspection, is really an attack on Black's King pawn.
15. P - Q 5 | Kt - B 4 ! |
Against Kostic in a previous game I had played Kt - B 1. It was carelessness on my part, but Marshall believed differently, otherwise he would not have played this variation, since, had he analysed this move, he would, I think, have realised that Black would obtain an excellent game. Black now threatens not only B P × P; but also Kt × P; followed by B P × P. The position is very interesting and full of possibilities.
Against Kostic in a previous game, I played Kt - B 1. It was carelessness on my part, but Marshall saw it differently; otherwise, he wouldn't have chosen this variation. Had he analyzed this move, I think he would have realized that Black would have a great position. Black now threatens not only B P × P but also Kt × P, followed by B P × P. The position is very interesting and full of possibilities.
16. P × K P | Kt × P (K 3) | |
17. B × Kt | Q × B |
played under the impression that White had to lose time in defending his Q R P, when I could play P - Q B 4, obtaining a very superior game. But, as will be seen, my opponent had quite a little surprise for me.
played thinking that White had to waste time defending his Q R P, when I could play P - Q B 4, getting a much better game. But, as you'll see, my opponent had a bit of a surprise for me.
18. Kt - Q 4 ! |
18. ........ | Q - K 4 ! |
Of course, if 18...Q × R P; 19 R - R 1 would win the Queen. The text move is probably the only satisfactory move in the position. The obvious move would have been Q - Q 2 to defend the Q B P, and then would have come 19 Kt - B 5, P - B 3; 20 Q - K Kt 3 (threatening Q R - Q 1), K - R 1; 21 Q R - Q 1, Q - K B 2; 22 P - K R 4, with a tremendous advantage in position. The text move, on the other hand, assures Black an even game at the very least, as will soon be seen. {242}
Of course, if 18...Q × RP; 19 R - R1 would win the Queen. The move in the text is probably the only decent option in this position. The obvious move would have been Q - Q2 to defend the QB P, and then 19 Kt - B5 would follow, P - B3; 20 Q - KKt3 (threatening Q R - Q1), K - R1; 21 Q R - Q1, Q - KB2; 22 P - KR4, giving a huge advantage in position. The move in the text, however, guarantees Black at least an equal game, as will soon be evident. {242}
19. Kt × P | Q × Q | |
20. R × Q | R - Q 7 | |
21. R - Kt 1 |
A very serious error of judgment. White is under the impression that he has the better game, because he is a Pawn ahead, but that is not so. The powerful position of the Black Rook at Q 7 fully compensates Black for the Pawn minus. Besides, the Bishop is better with Rooks than the Knight (see pages 48-56, where the relative values of the Knight and Bishop are compared), and, as already stated, with Pawns on both sides of the board the Bishop is superior because of its long range. Incidentally, this ending will demonstrate the great power of the Bishop. White's best chance was to take a draw at once, thus. 21 Kt - K 7 ch K - B 1; 22 R - B 7 R - K 1 (not B × P; because P - B 3 would give White the best of it); 23 R × B (best; not Kt - Kt 6 ch, because of B P × Kt; followed by R × K P), R × Kt; 24 R - Kt 8 ch, R - K 1; 25 R × R ch, K × R, and with proper play White will draw.
A serious mistake in judgment. White thinks he has the better game because he's a Pawn up, but that's not the case. The strong position of the Black Rook at Q7 fully makes up for the Pawn deficit. Plus, the Bishop is better with Rooks than the Knight (see pages 48-56, where the relative values of the Knight and Bishop are compared), and as mentioned earlier, with Pawns on both sides of the board, the Bishop is superior due to its long range. This ending will showcase the Bishop's power. White's best option was to go for a draw right away, like this: 21 Kt - K7 ch K - B1; 22 R - B7 R - K1 (not B × P; because P - B3 would give White the advantage); 23 R × B (best; not Kt - Kt6 ch, because of B P × Kt; followed by R × K P), R × Kt; 24 R - Kt8 ch, R - K1; 25 R × R ch, K × R, and with correct play, White will draw.
It is curious that, although a Pawn ahead, White is the one who is always in danger. It is only now, after seeing this analysis, that the value of Black's 18th move Q - K 4 can be fully appreciated.
It’s interesting that, even though White is a Pawn up, White is the one who is always in danger. Only now, after reviewing this analysis, can we truly see the value of Black's 18th move Q-K4.
21. ........ | R - K 1 |
With this powerful move Black begins, against White's centre, an assault which will soon be shifted against {243}the King itself. White is afraid to play 22 P - B 3 because of P - B 4.
With this strong move, Black starts an attack against White's center that will soon be directed at the King itself. White is hesitant to play 22 P - B 3 because of P - B 4.
22. P - K 5 | P - K Kt 4 |
To prevent P - B 4. The White Knight is practically pinned, because he does not dare move on account of R × K P.
To prevent P - B 4. The White Knight is basically stuck, because he doesn't want to move because of R × K P.
23. P - K R 4 |
This is a sequel to the previous move. White expects to disrupt Black's Pawns, and thus make them weak.
This is a follow-up to the last move. White aims to disrupt Black's Pawns to weaken them.
23. ........ | P × P |
Though doubled and isolated this Pawn exercises enormous pressure. Black now threatens R - K 3; to be followed by R - Kt 3 and P - R 6 and R 7 at the proper time.
Though doubled and isolated, this Pawn exerts huge pressure. Black now threatens R-K3, which could be followed by R-Kt3, P-R6, and R7 at the right moment.
24. R - K 1 |
24. ........ | R - K 3 ! |
Much better than taking Pawns. This forces White to defend the Knight with the Rook at K 1, because of the threat R - Kt 3.
Much better than capturing Pawns. This forces White to defend the Knight with the Rook at K 1 due to the threat R - Kt 3.
25. R (K1) - Q B 1 | K - Kt 2 |
Preparatory to R - Kt 3. The game is going to be decided on the King's side, and it is the isolated double Pawn that will supply the finishing touch.
Preparatory to R - Kt 3. The game will be decided on the King's side, and it's the isolated double Pawn that will provide the final touch.
26. P - Q Kt 4 | P - Kt 4 |
To prevent P - Kt 5, defending the Knight and liberating the Rooks.
To prevent P-Kt5, protect the Knight and free the Rooks.
27. P - R 3 | R - Kt 3 | |
28. K - B 1 | R - R 7 |
Notice the remarkable position of the pieces. White cannot move anything without incurring some loss. His best chance would have been to play 29 P - K 6, but that would only have prolonged the game, which is lost in any case.
Notice the impressive position of the pieces. White can't make any moves without losing something. His best option would have been to play 29 P - K 6, but that would just drag out the game, which is already lost anyway.
29. K - Kt 1 | P - R 6 | |
30. P - Kt 3 | P - Q R 3 |
Again forcing White to move and to lose something thereby, as all his pieces are tied up.
Again forcing White to move and lose something in the process, as all his pieces are tied up.
31. P - K 6 | R × K P |
Not even now can White move the Knight because of P - R 7 ch; K × P, R - R 3 ch; K - Kt 1, R - R 8 mate.
Not even now can White move the Knight because of P - R 7 check; K takes P, R - R 3 check; K to Kt 1, R - R 8 mate.
32. P - Kt 4 | R - R 3 | |
33. P - B 3 |
33. ........ | R - Q 3 | |
34. Kt - K 7 | R (Q3) - Q 7 | |
35. Kt - B 5 ch | K - B 3 | |
36. Kt - R 4 | K - Kt 4 | |
37. Kt - B 5 | R - Kt 7 ch | |
38. K - B 1 | P - R 7 | |
39. P - B 4 ch | K × B P | |
40. Resigns. |
An ending worth very careful study.
An ending that deserves thorough analysis.
Notes
[4] Full score and notes are given in My Chess Career, by J. R. Capablanca (Game No. 11).
[4] The complete score and notes can be found in My Chess Career, by J. R. Capablanca (Game No. 11).
[6] We give, from now on, games and notes, so that the student may familiarise himself with the many and varied considerations that constantly are borne in mind by the Chess Master. We must take it for granted that the student has already reached a stage where, while not being able fully to understand every move, yet he can derive benefit from any discussion with regard to them.
[6] From now on, we’ll provide games and notes to help students get familiar with the various factors that a Chess Master constantly considers. We assume that students have reached a level where, even if they don’t fully grasp every move, they can still gain insights from discussions about them.
[7] A "hole" in chess parlance has come to mean a defect in Pawn formation which allows the opponent to establish his forces in wedge formation or otherwise without the possibility of dislodging him by Pawn moves. Thus, in the following diagram, Black has two holes at K B 3 and K R 3, where White forces, e.g. a Kt or B, could establish themselves, supported by pieces or Pawns.
[7] In chess, a "hole" refers to a weakness in Pawn structure that lets the opponent set up their pieces in a wedge formation or otherwise without being able to push them back with Pawn moves. So, in the diagram below, Black has two holes at K B 3 and K R 3, where White's pieces, like a Knight or Bishop, could take position, backed up by other pieces or Pawns.
[8] See game Capablanca-Kupchick, from Havana International Masters Tournament Book, 1913, by J. R. Capablanca; or a game in the Carlsbad Tournament of 1911, Vidmar playing Black against Alechin.
[8] See the game Capablanca-Kupchick from the Havana International Masters Tournament Book, 1913, by J. R. Capablanca; or a game in the Carlsbad Tournament of 1911, where Vidmar played Black against Alechin.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!